L. E. Dickson :
“The simplest model for illustrating the conic sections ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
1 : 8
(August 1894 ),
pp. 261 .
MR
1513516
article
BibTeX
@article {key1513516m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard E.},
TITLE = {The simplest model for illustrating
the conic sections},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {1},
NUMBER = {8},
MONTH = {August},
YEAR = {1894},
PAGES = {261},
DOI = {10.2307/2971176},
NOTE = {MR:1513516.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the number of inscriptible regular polygons ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
3 : 5
(1894 ),
pp. 123–125 .
MR
1557312
article
BibTeX
@article {key1557312m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard E.},
TITLE = {On the number of inscriptible regular
polygons},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {3},
NUMBER = {5},
YEAR = {1894},
PAGES = {123--125},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1894-00191-8},
NOTE = {MR:1557312.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Biography: Dr. George Bruce Halsted ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
1 : 10
(October 1894 ),
pp. 336–340 .
MR
1513580
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1513580m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard E.},
TITLE = {Biography: {D}r. {G}eorge {B}ruce {H}alsted},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {1},
NUMBER = {10},
MONTH = {October},
YEAR = {1894},
PAGES = {336--340},
DOI = {10.2307/2969644},
NOTE = {MR:1513580.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Lowest integers representing sides of a right triangle ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
1 : 1
(January 1894 ),
pp. 6–11 .
MR
1513298
article
BibTeX
@article {key1513298m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard E.},
TITLE = {Lowest integers representing sides of
a right triangle},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {1},
NUMBER = {1},
MONTH = {January},
YEAR = {1894},
PAGES = {6--11},
DOI = {10.2307/2968644},
NOTE = {MR:1513298.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The inscription of regular polygons: Chapter I ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
1 : 9
(September 1894 ),
pp. 299–301 .
MR
1513546
article
BibTeX
@article {key1513546m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard E.},
TITLE = {The inscription of regular polygons:
{C}hapter {I}},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {1},
NUMBER = {9},
MONTH = {September},
YEAR = {1894},
PAGES = {299--301},
DOI = {10.2307/2967797},
NOTE = {MR:1513546.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The inscription of regular polygons: Chapter II ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
1 : 10
(October 1894 ),
pp. 342–345 .
MR
1513582
article
BibTeX
@article {key1513582m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard E.},
TITLE = {The inscription of regular polygons:
{C}hapter {II}},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {1},
NUMBER = {10},
MONTH = {October},
YEAR = {1894},
PAGES = {342--345},
DOI = {10.2307/2969646},
NOTE = {MR:1513582.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The inscription of regular polygons: Chapter III ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
1 : 11
(November 1894 ),
pp. 376–377 .
MR
1513609
article
BibTeX
@article {key1513609m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard E.},
TITLE = {The inscription of regular polygons:
{C}hapter {III}},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {1},
NUMBER = {11},
MONTH = {November},
YEAR = {1894},
PAGES = {376--377},
DOI = {10.2307/2969383},
NOTE = {MR:1513609.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The inscription of regular polygons: Chapter IV ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
1 : 12
(December 1894 ),
pp. 423–425 .
MR
1513645
article
BibTeX
@article {key1513645m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard E.},
TITLE = {The inscription of regular polygons:
{C}hapter {IV}},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {1},
NUMBER = {12},
MONTH = {December},
YEAR = {1894},
PAGES = {423--425},
DOI = {10.2307/2969037},
NOTE = {MR:1513645.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the inscription of regular polygons ,”
Ann. Math.
9 : 1–6
(1894–1895 ),
pp. 73–84 .
MR
1502183
JFM
26.0568.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
@article {key1502183m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard E.},
TITLE = {On the inscription of regular polygons},
JOURNAL = {Ann. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Annals of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {9},
NUMBER = {1--6},
YEAR = {1894--1895},
PAGES = {73--84},
DOI = {10.2307/1967509},
NOTE = {MR:1502183. JFM:26.0568.01.},
ISSN = {0003-486X},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A quadratic Cremona transformation defined by a conic ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
2 : 7–8
(July–August 1895 ),
pp. 218–221 .
Also published in Rend. Circ. Mat. Palermo 9 :1 (1895) .
MR
1513859
article
BibTeX
@article {key1513859m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard E.},
TITLE = {A quadratic {C}remona transformation
defined by a conic},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {2},
NUMBER = {7--8},
MONTH = {July--August},
YEAR = {1895},
PAGES = {218--221},
DOI = {10.2307/2968245},
NOTE = {Also published in \textit{Rend. Circ.
Mat. Palermo} \textbf{9}:1 (1895). MR:1513859.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Cyclic numbers ,”
Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.
27
(1895 ),
pp. 366–377 .
JFM
26.0206.02
article
BibTeX
@article {key26.0206.02j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Cyclic numbers},
JOURNAL = {Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Quarterly Journal of Pure and Applied
Mathematics},
VOLUME = {27},
YEAR = {1895},
PAGES = {366--377},
NOTE = {JFM:26.0206.02.},
ISSN = {1549-6724},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Some fallacies of an angle trisector ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
2 : 3
(March 1895 ),
pp. 71–72 .
MR
1513727
article
BibTeX
@article {key1513727m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard E.},
TITLE = {Some fallacies of an angle trisector},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {2},
NUMBER = {3},
MONTH = {March},
YEAR = {1895},
PAGES = {71--72},
DOI = {10.2307/2969935},
NOTE = {MR:1513727.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A quadratic Cremona transformation defined by a conic ,”
Rend. Circ. Mat. Palermo
9 : 1
(1895 ),
pp. 256–259 .
Also published in Amer. Math. Monthly 2 :7–8 (1895) .
JFM
26.0610.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key26.0610.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard E.},
TITLE = {A quadratic {C}remona transformation
defined by a conic},
JOURNAL = {Rend. Circ. Mat. Palermo},
FJOURNAL = {Rendiconti del Circolo Matematico di
Palermo},
VOLUME = {9},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1895},
PAGES = {256--259},
DOI = {10.1007/BF03012867},
NOTE = {Also published in \textit{Amer. Math.
Monthly} \textbf{2}:7--8 (1895). JFM:26.0610.01.},
ISSN = {1973-4409},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Gergonne’s pile problem ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
1 : 7
(1895 ),
pp. 184–186 .
MR
1557376
JFM
26.0239.03
article
BibTeX
@article {key1557376m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard E.},
TITLE = {Gergonne's pile problem},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {1},
NUMBER = {7},
YEAR = {1895},
PAGES = {184--186},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1895-00277-3},
NOTE = {MR:1557376. JFM:26.0239.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The inscription of regular polygons: Chapter V ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
2 : 1
(January 1895 ),
pp. 7–9 .
MR
1513673
article
BibTeX
@article {key1513673m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard E.},
TITLE = {The inscription of regular polygons:
{C}hapter {V}},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {2},
NUMBER = {1},
MONTH = {January},
YEAR = {1895},
PAGES = {7--9},
DOI = {10.2307/2971575},
NOTE = {MR:1513673.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The inscription of regular polygons: Chapter VI ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
2 : 2
(February 1895 ),
pp. 38–40 .
MR
1513697
article
BibTeX
@article {key1513697m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard E.},
TITLE = {The inscription of regular polygons:
{C}hapter {VI}},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {2},
NUMBER = {2},
MONTH = {February},
YEAR = {1895},
PAGES = {38--40},
DOI = {10.2307/2968667},
NOTE = {MR:1513697.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Analytic functions suitable to represent substitutions ,”
Amer. J. Math.
18 : 3
(July 1896 ),
pp. 210–218 .
MR
1505712
JFM
27.0105.02
article
BibTeX
@article {key1505712m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard E.},
TITLE = {Analytic functions suitable to represent
substitutions},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {18},
NUMBER = {3},
MONTH = {July},
YEAR = {1896},
PAGES = {210--218},
DOI = {10.2307/2369795},
NOTE = {MR:1505712. JFM:27.0105.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
The analytic representation of substitutions on a power of a prime number of letters with a discussion of the linear group .
Ph.D. thesis ,
University of Chicago ,
1896 .
Advised by E. H. Moore .
See also articles in Ann. Math. 11 :1–6 (1896–1897) and Ann. Math. 11 :1–6 (1896–1897) .
MR
2936778
phdthesis
People
BibTeX
@phdthesis {key2936778m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {The analytic representation of substitutions
on a power of a prime number of letters
with a discussion of the linear group},
SCHOOL = {University of Chicago},
YEAR = {1896},
URL = {http://search.proquest.com/docview/301727558},
NOTE = {Advised by E. H. Moore. See
also articles in \textit{Ann. Math.}
\textbf{11}:1--6 (1896--1897) and \textit{Ann.
Math.} \textbf{11}:1--6 (1896--1897).
MR:2936778.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The analytic representation of substitutions on a power of a prime number of letters with a discussion of the linear group, I: Analytic representation of substitutions ,”
Ann. Math.
11 : 1–6
(1896–1897 ),
pp. 161–183 .
Part II published in Ann. Math. 11 :1–6 (1896–1897) . See also Dickson’s PhD thesis .
MR
1502221
article
BibTeX
@article {key1502221m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {The analytic representation of substitutions
on a power of a prime number of letters
with a discussion of the linear group,
{I}: {A}nalytic representation of substitutions},
JOURNAL = {Ann. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Annals of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {11},
NUMBER = {1--6},
YEAR = {1896--1897},
PAGES = {161--183},
DOI = {10.2307/1967224},
NOTE = {Part II published in \textit{Ann. Math.}
\textbf{11}:1--6 (1896--1897). See also
Dickson's PhD thesis. MR:1502221.},
ISSN = {0003-486X},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The analytic representation of substitutions on a power of a prime number of letters with a discussion of the linear group, II: Linear groups ,”
Ann. Math.
11 : 1–6
(1896–1897 ),
pp. 65–120 .
Part I published in Ann. Math. 11 :1–6 (1896–1897) . See also Dickson’s PhD thesis .
MR
1502214
article
BibTeX
@article {key1502214m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {The analytic representation of substitutions
on a power of a prime number of letters
with a discussion of the linear group,
{II}: {L}inear groups},
JOURNAL = {Ann. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Annals of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {11},
NUMBER = {1--6},
YEAR = {1896--1897},
PAGES = {65--120},
DOI = {10.2307/1967217},
NOTE = {Part I published in \textit{Ann. Math.}
\textbf{11}:1--6 (1896--1897). See also
Dickson's PhD thesis. MR:1502214.},
ISSN = {0003-486X},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Systems of continuous and discontinuous simple groups ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
3 : 8
(1897 ),
pp. 265–273 .
MR
1557521
JFM
28.0320.02
article
BibTeX
@article {key1557521m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard E.},
TITLE = {Systems of continuous and discontinuous
simple groups},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {3},
NUMBER = {8},
YEAR = {1897},
PAGES = {265--273},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1897-00410-4},
NOTE = {MR:1557521. JFM:28.0320.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Higher irreducible congruences ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
3 : 10
(1897 ),
pp. 381–389 .
MR
1557535
JFM
28.0185.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1557535m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard E.},
TITLE = {Higher irreducible congruences},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {3},
NUMBER = {10},
YEAR = {1897},
PAGES = {381--389},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1897-00428-1},
NOTE = {MR:1557535. JFM:28.0185.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The structure of the hypoabelian groups ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
4 : 10
(1898 ),
pp. 495–510 .
MR
1557641
JFM
29.0119.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
This paper gives a marked simplification both in the general conceptions and in the detailed developments of the theory of the two hypoabelian groups of Jordan and of the writer’s generalization [1898] to the Galois field of order \( {}2^n \) of the first hypoabelian group. It is important, especially for the generalization, to give these groups an abstract definition independent of the theory of “exposants d’échange,” by means of which Jordan derived them. The crucial point in the simplified treatment lies in the discovery of the explicit relations
\begin{align*} & \sum_{i,j}^{1,\dots,m}\alpha_j^{(i)}\delta_j^{(i)} = m, \\ &\sum_{i,j}^{1,\dots,m}\alpha_j^{(i)}\delta_j^{(i)} + \alpha^{\prime}_1 + \beta^{\prime}_1 + \gamma^{\prime}_1 + \delta^{\prime}_1 = m, \end{align*}
satisfied by the substitutions of the simple sub-groups \( J \) and \( J_1 \) respectively, but ruling out the remaining substitutions of the total hypoabelian groups \( G \) and \( G_1 \) . We may therefore avoid the dependence made in §§274 and 289 upon the last book of the Traité (see §672, page 506).
Basing the investigation upon the groups \( J \) and \( J_1 \) which are to be proved simple, and not upon \( G \) and \( G_1 \) as in the earlier treatments, we wholly avoid the delicate analysis and calculations necessary in §§275 and 290. For the first hypoabelian group, the sub-division into cases is diminished one-half. For the second hypoabelian group, decided simplifications may be made in §§284, 286–8. Some errors have been detected; thus the groups \( G \) and \( G_1 \) do not have the same order, as stated in Jordan, §279. §291 is wholly wrong.
@article {key1557641m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The structure of the hypoabelian groups},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {4},
NUMBER = {10},
YEAR = {1898},
PAGES = {495--510},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1898-00530-X},
NOTE = {MR:1557641. JFM:29.0119.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A new solution of the cubic equation ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
5 : 2
(February 1898 ),
pp. 38–39 .
MR
1514484
article
BibTeX
@article {key1514484m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A new solution of the cubic equation},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {5},
NUMBER = {2},
MONTH = {February},
YEAR = {1898},
PAGES = {38--39},
DOI = {10.2307/2968562},
NOTE = {MR:1514484.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Concerning a linear homogeneous group in \( C_{m,\,q} \) variables isomorphic to the general linear homogeneous group in \( m \) variables ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
5 : 3
(1898 ),
pp. 120–135 .
MR
1557673
JFM
29.0119.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
While the present paper is concerned chiefly with continuous groups, its results may be readily utilized for discontinuous groups. Indeed, the finite form of the general transformation of the group is known ab initio . Further, the method is applicable to the construction of a linear \( C_{m,q} \) -ary group isomorphic to an arbitrary \( m \) -ary linear group.
@article {key1557673m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Concerning a linear homogeneous group
in \$C_{m,\,q}\$ variables isomorphic
to the general linear homogeneous group
in \$m\$ variables},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {5},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1898},
PAGES = {120--135},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1898-00579-7},
NOTE = {MR:1557673. JFM:29.0119.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Systems of simple groups derived from the orthogonal group ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
4 : 8
(1898 ),
pp. 382–389 .
An article with the same title (“the complete memoir” according to LED) was also published in California Acad. Proc. 1 (1898) .
MR
1557622
article
BibTeX
@article {key1557622m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Systems of simple groups derived from
the orthogonal group},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {4},
NUMBER = {8},
YEAR = {1898},
PAGES = {382--389},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1898-00514-1},
NOTE = {An article with the same title (``the
complete memoir'' according to LED)
was also published in \textit{California
Acad. Proc.} \textbf{1} (1898). MR:1557622.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The quadratic Cremona transformation ,”
California Acad. Proc.
1
(1898 ),
pp. 13–23 .
JFM
29.0570.04
article
BibTeX
@article {key29.0570.04j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The quadratic {C}remona transformation},
JOURNAL = {California Acad. Proc.},
FJOURNAL = {Proceedings of the California Academy
of Sciences},
VOLUME = {1},
YEAR = {1898},
PAGES = {13--23},
NOTE = {JFM:29.0570.04.},
ISSN = {0068-547X},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Systems of simple groups derived from the orthogonal group ,”
California Acad. Proc.
1
(1898 ),
pp. 29–40 .
A shorter article with the same title was published in Bull. Am. Math. Soc. 4 :8 (1898) .
JFM
29.0121.03
article
BibTeX
@article {key29.0121.03j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Systems of simple groups derived from
the orthogonal group},
JOURNAL = {California Acad. Proc.},
FJOURNAL = {Proceedings of the California Academy
of Sciences},
VOLUME = {1},
YEAR = {1898},
PAGES = {29--40},
NOTE = {A shorter article with the same title
was published in \textit{Bull. Am. Math.
Soc.} \textbf{4}:8 (1898). JFM:29.0121.03.},
ISSN = {0068-547X},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A new triply-infinite system of simple groups obtained by a twofold generalization of Jordan’s first hypoabelian group ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
5 : 1
(1898 ),
pp. 10–12 .
Abstract only.
Available open access
here .
JFM
29.0121.04
article
BibTeX
@article {key29.0121.04j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A new triply-infinite system of simple
groups obtained by a twofold generalization
of {J}ordan's first hypoabelian group},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {5},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1898},
PAGES = {10--12},
NOTE = {Abstract only. Available open access
at http://www.ams.org/journals/bull/1898-05-01/S0002-9904-1898-00565-7/S0002-9904-1898-00565-7.pdf.
JFM:29.0121.04.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A triply infinite system of simple groups ,”
Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.
29
(1898 ),
pp. 169–178 .
JFM
28.0136.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key28.0136.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A triply infinite system of simple groups},
JOURNAL = {Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Quarterly Journal of Pure and Applied
Mathematics},
VOLUME = {29},
YEAR = {1898},
PAGES = {169--178},
NOTE = {JFM:28.0136.01.},
ISSN = {1549-6724},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Orthogonal group in a Galois field ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
4 : 5
(1898 ),
pp. 196–200 .
MR
1557585
article
BibTeX
@article {key1557585m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Orthogonal group in a {G}alois field},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {4},
NUMBER = {5},
YEAR = {1898},
PAGES = {196--200},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1898-00481-0},
NOTE = {MR:1557585.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Determination of the structure of all linear homogeneous groups in a Galois field which are defined by a quadratic invariant ,”
Amer. J. Math.
21 : 3
(July 1899 ),
pp. 193–256 .
MR
1505798
JFM
30.0137.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Following the study of certain classes of finite linear groups defined by a quadratic invariant, it seems desirable to have a complete determination of this important type of groups. Besides the work of Jordan [1870, pp. 195–213, 440] on the two hypoabelian groups in the field of integers taken modulo \( {}2 \) , and the writer’s generalization [1898a, 1898b] of the first hypoabelian group to the Galois field of order \( {}2^n \) , the structures of the orthogonal group [1898c] on \( m \) indices in the Galois field of order \( p^n \) (aside from certain low values of \( m \) , \( n \) , \( p \) ) and of the group [1899] in the same field, leaving invariant the quadratic form \( \sum_{i=1}^m\xi_i\eta_i \) , have been previously determined by the writer.
By setting up a complete set of canonical forms for quadratic forms in \( m \) variables in every Galois field, we are able to prove that there exist but two new distinct types of groups defined by a quadratic invariant, one of these being a generalization of the second hypoabelian group of Jordan. Two new systems of simple groups are thus obtained [see §56]. The investigation completes and correlates the results of the earlier papers. It has been the aim throughout to devise methods which require as few separations into cases and special treatments of lower cases as possible. The earlier methods for the orthogonal group have been abandoned in the main.
@article {key1505798m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Determination of the structure of all
linear homogeneous groups in a {G}alois
field which are defined by a quadratic
invariant},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {21},
NUMBER = {3},
MONTH = {July},
YEAR = {1899},
PAGES = {193--256},
DOI = {10.2307/2369602},
NOTE = {MR:1505798. JFM:30.0137.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The structure of certain linear groups with quadratic invariants ,”
Proc. London Math. Soc.
30 : 1
(1899 ),
pp. 70–98 .
MR
1575479
JFM
30.0137.02
article
BibTeX
@article {key1575479m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The structure of certain linear groups
with quadratic invariants},
JOURNAL = {Proc. London Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Proceedings of the London Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {30},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1899},
PAGES = {70--98},
DOI = {10.1112/plms/s1-30.1.70},
NOTE = {MR:1575479. JFM:30.0137.02.},
ISSN = {0024-6115},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Sur plusieurs groupes lineaires isomorphes au groups simple d’ordre \( {}25920 \) ”
[On several linear groups isomorphic to the simple group of order 25920 ],
C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris
128
(1899 ),
pp. 873–875 .
JFM
30.0141.02
article
BibTeX
@article {key30.0141.02j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Sur plusieurs groupes lineaires isomorphes
au groups simple d'ordre \${}25920\$ [On
several linear groups isomorphic to
the simple group of order 25920]},
JOURNAL = {C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris},
FJOURNAL = {Comptes Rendus Hebdomadaires des S\'eances
de l'Acad\'emie des Sciences, Paris},
VOLUME = {128},
YEAR = {1899},
PAGES = {873--875},
NOTE = {JFM:30.0141.02.},
ISSN = {0001-4036},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Sur une generalisation du théorème de Fermat ”
[On a generalization of Fermat’s theorem ],
C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris
128
(1899 ),
pp. 1083–1085 .
French translation of article in Ann. Math. 1 :1–4 (1898–1900) .
JFM
30.0185.02
article
BibTeX
@article {key30.0185.02j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Sur une generalisation du th\'eor\`eme
de {F}ermat [On a generalization of
{F}ermat's theorem]},
JOURNAL = {C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris},
FJOURNAL = {Comptes Rendus Hebdomadaires des S\'eances
de l'Acad\'emie des Sciences, Paris},
VOLUME = {128},
YEAR = {1899},
PAGES = {1083--1085},
NOTE = {French translation of article in \textit{Ann.
Math.} \textbf{1}:1--4 (1898--1900).
JFM:30.0185.02.},
ISSN = {0001-4036},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The largest linear homogeneous group with an invariant Pfaffian ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
5 : 3
(1899 ),
pp. 338–342 .
JFM
30.0142.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In the December number of the Bulletin (pp. 120–135) I have shown that the second compound of the general \( {}2m \) -ary linear homogeneous group is a linear group in \( C_{2m,2} \equiv m(2m-1) \) variables which leaves invariant the Pfaffian
\[ F \equiv [1, 2,\dots,2m]. \]
Denoting the variables as follows:
\begin{equation*}\tag{1} Y_{ij} \equiv -Y_{ji} \qquad (i,j = 1,\dots,2m;\ i\neq j), \end{equation*}
the second compound was proved to contain exactly \( (2m)^2 \) linearly independent infinitesimal transformations
\begin{equation*}\tag{2} \sum_{r\neq s, t}^{r=1,\dots,2m} Y_{rt}\frac{\partial f}{\partial Y_{rs}}\delta t \qquad (t,s = 1,\dots,2m). \end{equation*}
The object of the present note is to prove that the largest linear homogeneous group \( G \) in the \( m(2m-1) \) variables (1) which leaves invariant the Pfaffian \( F \) contains only the \( (2m)^2 \) linearly independent transformations (2).
@article {key30.0142.02j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The largest linear homogeneous group
with an invariant {P}faffian},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {5},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1899},
PAGES = {338--342},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1899-00619-0},
NOTE = {JFM:30.0142.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The group of linear homogeneous substitutions on \( m_q \) variables which is defined by the invariant \( \Phi=\sum_{i=1}^{i=m}\xi_{i1}\xi_{i2}\dots\xi_{iq} \) ,”
Proc. London Math. Soc.
30 : 1
(1899 ),
pp. 200–208 .
MR
1575464
JFM
30.0141.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1575464m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The group of linear homogeneous substitutions
on \$m_q\$ variables which is defined
by the invariant \$\Phi=\sum_{i=1}^{i=m}\xi_{i1}\xi_{i2}\dots\xi_{iq}\$},
JOURNAL = {Proc. London Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Proceedings of the London Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {30},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1899},
PAGES = {200--208},
DOI = {10.1112/plms/s1-30.1.200},
NOTE = {MR:1575464. JFM:30.0141.01.},
ISSN = {0024-6115},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The known finite simple groups ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
5 : 10
(1899 ),
pp. 470–475 .
JFM
30.0143.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The list of systems of simple groups given in the Bulletin for May, 1897, may be enlarged by the addition of a number of new systems determined by the writer during the past two years. By request a table has been constructed which should aid in the determination of the status of a newly discovered simple group.
@article {key30.0143.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The known finite simple groups},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {5},
NUMBER = {10},
YEAR = {1899},
PAGES = {470--475},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1899-00635-9},
NOTE = {JFM:30.0143.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Report on the recent progress in the theory of linear groups ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
6 : 1
(1899 ),
pp. 13–27 .
JFM
30.0042.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key30.0042.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Report on the recent progress in the
theory of linear groups},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {6},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1899},
PAGES = {13--27},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1899-00666-9},
NOTE = {JFM:30.0042.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The first hypoabelian group generalized ,”
Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.
30
(1899 ),
pp. 1–16 .
JFM
29.0118.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key29.0118.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The first hypoabelian group generalized},
JOURNAL = {Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Quarterly Journal of Pure and Applied
Mathematics},
VOLUME = {30},
YEAR = {1899},
PAGES = {1--16},
NOTE = {JFM:29.0118.01.},
ISSN = {1549-6724},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Simplicity of the Abelian group on two pairs of indices in the Galois field of order \( {}2^n \) , \( n > 1 \) ,”
Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.
30
(1899 ),
pp. 383–384 .
JFM
29.0118.02
article
BibTeX
@article {key29.0118.02j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Simplicity of the Abelian group on two
pairs of indices in the {G}alois field
of order \${}2^n\$, \$n>1\$},
JOURNAL = {Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Quarterly Journal of Pure and Applied
Mathematics},
VOLUME = {30},
YEAR = {1899},
PAGES = {383--384},
NOTE = {JFM:29.0118.02.},
ISSN = {1549-6724},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Concerning the four known simple linear groups of order \( {}25920 \) , with an introduction to the hyper-abelian linear groups ,”
Proc. London Math. Soc.
31 : 1
(1899 ),
pp. 30–68 .
MR
1576714
JFM
30.0138.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In a paper [Dickson 1899] giving a résumé of the known systems of simple groups and a table of the orders of all known simple groups not exceeding one million, I find that, apart from the order \( {}25920 \) , every case in which two or more simple groups of the same order exist has been completely investigated as to their simple isomorphism or non- isomorphism. The greater part of the present paper deals with the four known simple groups of order \( {}25920 \) , viz.,
The simple group \( A(4,3) \) , defined by the decomposition of the Abelian group on four indices taken modulo \( {}3 \) .
The second hypo-Abelian group \( SH(6,2) \) , a sub-group of index \( {}2 \) under the general hypo-Abelian group on six indices taken modulo \( {}2 \) .
The orthogonal group \( O(5,3) \) , a sub-group of index \( {}4 \) under the total orthogonal group on five indices taken modulo \( {}3 \) .
The hyper-Abelian group \( HA(4,2^2) \) of quaternary hyper-Abelian substitutions of determinant unity in the Galois field of \( {}3 \) order \( {}2^2 \) .
@article {key1576714m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Concerning the four known simple linear
groups of order \${}25920\$, with an introduction
to the hyper-abelian linear groups},
JOURNAL = {Proc. London Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Proceedings of the London Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {31},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1899},
PAGES = {30--68},
DOI = {10.1112/plms/s1-31.1.30},
NOTE = {MR:1576714. JFM:30.0138.01.},
ISSN = {0024-6115},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The abstract group isomorphic with the symmetric group on \( k \) letters ,”
Proc. London Math. Soc.
31 : 1
(1899 ),
pp. 351–353 .
MR
1576717
JFM
30.0141.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
At the annual meeting of the American Mathematical Society, August 25th and 26th, I presented a very elementary proof of the following theorem due to Prof. Moore (Proc. Lond. Math. Soc , vol. XXVIII, pp. 357–300):
The abstract group \( G(k) \) generated by the operators \( B_1 \) , \( B_2,\dots, \) \( B_{k-1} \) with the generational relations
\( B_1^2 = B_2^2 = \cdots = B_{k-1}^2 = 1 \) ,
\( B_iB_j = B_jB_i \) (\( i = 1 \) , \( {}2,\dots, \) \( k-3 \) ; \( j=i+2 \) , \( i+3,\dots, \) \( k-1 \) ),
\( B_j B_{j+1} B_j = B_{j+1} B_j B_{j+1} \) (\( j=1 \) , \( {}2,\dots, \) \( k-2 \) ),
is simply isomorphic with the symmetric substitution-group on \( k \) letters.
@article {key1576717m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The abstract group isomorphic with the
symmetric group on \$k\$ letters},
JOURNAL = {Proc. London Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Proceedings of the London Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {31},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1899},
PAGES = {351--353},
DOI = {10.1112/plms/s1-31.1.351},
NOTE = {MR:1576717. JFM:30.0141.03.},
ISSN = {0024-6115},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The structure of the linear homogeneous groups defined by the invariant \( \lambda^1\zeta_1^r+\lambda^2\zeta_2^r+\cdots+\lambda^m\zeta_m^r \) ,”
Math. Ann.
52 : 4
(1899 ),
pp. 561–581 .
MR
1511073
JFM
30.0140.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
We study the largest linear homogeneous group in \( m \) variables which leaves absolutely invariant the function
\[ \phi_r \equiv \sum_{i=1}^m\lambda_i\xi_i^r \]
(each \( \lambda_i\neq 0 \) ). For \( r > 2 \) , there exists no continuous group leaving \( \phi_r \) invariant; while for \( r=2 \) the continuous group defined is the well known orthogonal group. For \( r > 2 \) , every collineation leaving \( \phi_r = 0 \) invariant merely interchanges the terms \( \lambda_i\xi_i^r \) .
The greater part of the investigation is concerned with linear substitutions whose coefficients are complexes in the Galois field) of order \( p^n \) , including the special case of integers taken modulo \( p \) . The case \( r = 2 \) is not considered in the present paper, having been treated at length by the writer in earlier papers [1899, 1898]
@article {key1511073m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {The structure of the linear homogeneous
groups defined by the invariant \$\lambda^1\zeta_1^r+\lambda^2\zeta_2^r+\cdots+\lambda^m\zeta_m^r\$},
JOURNAL = {Math. Ann.},
FJOURNAL = {Mathematische Annalen},
VOLUME = {52},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1899},
PAGES = {561--581},
DOI = {10.1007/BF01453775},
NOTE = {MR:1511073. JFM:30.0140.01.},
ISSN = {0025-5831},
CODEN = {MAANA},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A generalization of Fermat’s theorem ,”
Ann. Math. (2)
1 : 1–4
(1899–1900 ),
pp. 31–36 .
French translation published in C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 128 (1899) .
MR
1502247
JFM
30.0185.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In a number of investigations, apparently not related to each other, there occurs the following function:
\begin{align*} F(a,N) \equiv a^N &- \bigl(a^{N/p_1} + a^{N/p_2} + \cdots + a^{N/p_s}\bigr)\\ &+ \bigl(a^{N/p_1p_2} + a^{N/p_1p_3} + \dots + a^{N/p_{s-1}p_s}\bigr)\\ &- \bigl(a^{N/p_1p_2p_3} + \dots + a^{N/p_{s-2}p_{s-1}p_s}\bigr)\\ &+ \dots + (-1)^sa^{N/p_1p_2\dots p_s}, \end{align*}
\( a \) being any integer and \( N \) any positive integer whose distinct prime factors are \( p_1 \) , \( p_2,\dots, \) \( p_s \) . The theorem which we shall consider in the present paper is that \( F(a,N) \) is divisible by \( N \) for every \( a \) and \( N \) . This theorem is a generalization of Fermat’s theorem, to which it reduces when \( N \) is prime.
If §§2–5 of the present paper it is explained how the function \( F(a,N) \) has occured in four distinct mathematical researhes, and how from each of these points of view indirect proofs of the above mentioned generalized theorem have been obtained. In §6 two new direct proofs of this theorem are given. In §7 a third new direct proof is given, based upon a relation observed by Picquet. In §§7 and 8 some further properties of the function \( F(a,N) \) are considered.
@article {key1502247m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A generalization of {F}ermat's theorem},
JOURNAL = {Ann. Math. (2)},
FJOURNAL = {Annals of Mathematics. Second Series},
VOLUME = {1},
NUMBER = {1--4},
YEAR = {1899--1900},
PAGES = {31--36},
DOI = {10.2307/1967263},
NOTE = {French translation published in \textit{C.
R. Acad. Sci. Paris} \textbf{128} (1899).
MR:1502247. JFM:30.0185.01.},
ISSN = {0003-486X},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A new definition of the general Abelian linear group ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
1 : 1
(1900 ),
pp. 91–96 .
MR
1500527
JFM
31.0138.04
article
Abstract
BibTeX
We may give a striking definition of the general Abelian group, making use of the fruitful conception of the “compounds of a given linear homogeneous group,” introduced in recent papers by the writer [1898]. In §3 we determine the multiplicity of the isomorphism of a given linear homogeneous group to its compound groups. This result is applied in §4 to show the simple relation of the Abelian group to the general linear homogeneous group in the same number of variables. In §5 it is shown that the simple groups of composite order which are derived from the decompositions of the quaternary Abelian group and the quinary orthogonal group, each in the \( \mathit{GF}[p^n] \) , \( p > 2 \) , are simply isomorphic. The investigation affords a proof of the simple isomorphism between the corresponding ten-parameter projective groups without the consideration of their infinitesimal transformations.
@article {key1500527m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {A new definition of the general {A}belian
linear group},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {1},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1900},
PAGES = {91--96},
DOI = {10.2307/1986406},
NOTE = {MR:1500527. JFM:31.0138.04.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Definition of the abelian, the two hypoabelian, and related linear groups as quotient-groups of the groups of isomorphisms of certain elementary groups ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
1 : 1
(1900 ),
pp. 30–38 .
MR
1500521
JFM
31.0138.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The present paper aims to give a natural definition of the Abelian and two hypoabelian groups, which moreover preserves the essence of Jordan’s definition based upon his important, but artificial, conception of “exposants d’échange” (Traité , pp. 179, 195). A second formal definition, by means of the invariants (11), (14) and (21) below, may be obtained from Jordan (l.c. p. 217 and pp. 438–440).
Following in the main the developments of Jordan (l.c. pp. 420–447, in particular) on the construction of solvable groups, we may obtain the above groups as quotient-groups of the groups of isomorphisms of certain elementary groups. In May, 1898, I communicated such a treatment to Professor Moore, who emphasized the desirability of presenting the definitions thus obtained for the Abelian and hypoabelian groups in two distinct ways: viz., from the standpoint of Jordan’s linear groups and from the standpoint of abstract groups.
Quite recently I have made the investigation from the latter point of view and have found the method so much simpler and more desirable that I have abandoned my earlier work, which was not fully complete, and give in §§8–10 a mere outline of it.
@article {key1500521m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Definition of the abelian, the two hypoabelian,
and related linear groups as quotient-groups
of the groups of isomorphisms of certain
elementary groups},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {1},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1900},
PAGES = {30--38},
DOI = {10.2307/1986400},
NOTE = {MR:1500521. JFM:31.0138.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Proof of the existence of the Galois field of order \( p^r \) for every integer \( r \) and prime number \( p \) ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
6 : 5
(1900 ),
pp. 203–204 .
MR
1557697
JFM
31.0142.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Existence proofs have been given by Serret [1879, pp. 122–142] and by Jordan [1870, pp. 16, 17]. The developments used by Serret are lengthy but quite in the spirit of Kronecker’s ideas. The short proof by Jordan, however, assumes with Galois the existence of imaginary roots of an irreducible congruence modulo \( p \) .
The proof sketched in this note proceeds by induction. Assuming the existence of the \( \mathit{GF}[p^n] \) , we derive that of the \( \mathit{GF}[p^{nq}] \) , \( q \) being an arbitrary prime number. Since the \( \mathit{GF}[p] \) exists, being the field of integers taken modulo \( p \) , it will follow that the \( \mathit{GF}[p^q] \) exists, and by a simple induction that the \( \mathit{GF}[p^r] \) exists for \( r \) arbitrary.
@article {key1557697m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Proof of the existence of the {G}alois
field of order \$p^r\$ for every integer
\$r\$ and prime number \$p\$},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {6},
NUMBER = {5},
YEAR = {1900},
PAGES = {203--204},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1900-00701-4},
NOTE = {MR:1557697. JFM:31.0142.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A class of linear groups including the Abelian group ,”
Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.
31
(1900 ),
pp. 60–66 .
JFM
30.0142.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key30.0142.01 j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A class of linear groups including the
{A}belian group},
JOURNAL = {Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Quarterly Journal of Pure and Applied
Mathematics},
VOLUME = {31},
YEAR = {1900},
PAGES = {60--66},
NOTE = {JFM:30.0142.01 .},
ISSN = {1549-6724},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Proof of the non-isomorphism of the simple Abelian group on \( {}2m \) indices and the orthogonal group on \( {}2m+1 \) indices for \( m > 2 \) ,”
Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.
32
(1900 ),
pp. 42–63 .
JFM
31.0142.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key31.0142.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Proof of the non-isomorphism of the
simple {A}belian group on \${}2m\$ indices
and the orthogonal group on \${}2m+1\$
indices for \$m>2\$},
JOURNAL = {Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Quarterly Journal of Pure and Applied
Mathematics},
VOLUME = {32},
YEAR = {1900},
PAGES = {42--63},
NOTE = {JFM:31.0142.01.},
ISSN = {1549-6724},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Errata: ‘Determination of an abstract simple group of order \( {}2^7\cdot3^6\cdot5\cdot7 \) holoedrically isomorphic with a certain orthogonal group and with a certain hyperabelian group’ ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
1 : 4
(1900 ),
pp. 509 .
Errata for article in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 1 :3 (1900) .
MR
1500436
article
BibTeX
@article {key1500436m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Errata: ``{D}etermination of an abstract
simple group of order \${}2^7\cdot3^6\cdot5\cdot7\$
holoedrically isomorphic with a certain
orthogonal group and with a certain
hyperabelian group''},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {1},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1900},
PAGES = {509},
URL = {http://www.jstor.org/stable/1986369},
NOTE = {Errata for article in \textit{Trans.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{1}:3 (1900).
MR:1500436.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“An abstract simple group of order \( {}25920 \) ,”
Proc. London Math. Soc.
32 : 1
(1900 ),
pp. 3–10 .
MR
1576228
JFM
31.0143.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The abstract form of the known simple group of order \( {}25920 \) was determined by the writer in the Proceedings of the Society, vol. XXXI, pp. 40–45. The present paper gives a simpler method of solving the problem. Furthermore, it has direct contact with the developments of Jordan on the group of the equation for the \( {}27 \) lines on a cubic surface. [Jordan 1870; Dickson 1899]
@article {key1576228m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {An abstract simple group of order \${}25920\$},
JOURNAL = {Proc. London Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Proceedings of the London Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {32},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1900},
PAGES = {3--10},
DOI = {10.1112/plms/s1-32.1.3},
NOTE = {MR:1576228. JFM:31.0143.02.},
ISSN = {0024-6115},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Certain subgroups of the Betti–Mathieu group ,”
Amer. J. Math.
22 : 1
(January 1900 ),
pp. 49–54 .
MR
1507867
JFM
31.0142.03
article
BibTeX
@article {key1507867m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Certain subgroups of the {B}etti--{M}athieu
group},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {22},
NUMBER = {1},
MONTH = {January},
YEAR = {1900},
PAGES = {49--54},
DOI = {10.2307/2369769},
NOTE = {MR:1507867. JFM:31.0142.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Canonical form of a linear homogeneous substitution in a Galois field ,”
Amer. J. Math.
22 : 2
(April 1900 ),
pp. 121–137 .
MR
1507868
JFM
31.0140.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
A simple canonical form of the general \( m \) -ary linear homogeneous substitution with integral coefficients taken modulo \( p \) , a prime, has been obtained by M. Jordan by a rather lengthy analysis [1870, pp. 114–126]. The method may be readily genearlized to apply to substitutions in an arbitrary Galois field. The present paper, however, gives a short proof by induction of the generalized theorem. That the new method is of practical value in actually reducing a given substitution to its canonical form is illustrated by the example of §3.
In §§4–7, the explicit form of all substitutions in the \( \mathit{GF}[p^n] \) commutative with a given substitution in that field is set up. In particular, the number of such substitutions is deduced, the result being in accord with that of M. Jordan [1870, p. 136] for the case \( n=1 \) .
In §8 is given a simple criterion for the conjugacy of two linear homogeneous substitutions in a Galois field.
@article {key1507868m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Canonical form of a linear homogeneous
substitution in a {G}alois field},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {22},
NUMBER = {2},
MONTH = {April},
YEAR = {1900},
PAGES = {121--137},
DOI = {10.2307/2369750},
NOTE = {MR:1507868. JFM:31.0140.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Determination of an abstract simple group of order \( {}2^7\cdot3^6\cdot 5\cdot 7 \) holoedrically isomorphic with a certain orthogonal group and with a certain hyperabelian group ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
1 : 3
(July 1900 ),
pp. 353–370 .
Errata published in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 1 :4 (1900) .
MR
1500543
JFM
31.0140.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Among the known simple groups occur an orthogonal group and a hyper-abelian group of the same order \( {}2^7\cdot 3^6\cdot 5\cdot 7 \) . They are shown to be holoedrically isomorphic in this paper. We first determine in §§2–14 an abstract group \( \Gamma \) (§§4,2) simply isomorphic with the orthogonal group. This is accomplished by means of a rectangular array, a direct method of procedure employed by the writer in two recent papers in the Proceedings of the London Mathematical Society (vol. 31, p. 30; vol. 31, p. 351).
@article {key1500543m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Determination of an abstract simple
group of order \${}2^7\cdot3^6\cdot 5\cdot
7\$ holoedrically isomorphic with a certain
orthogonal group and with a certain
hyperabelian group},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {1},
NUMBER = {3},
MONTH = {July},
YEAR = {1900},
PAGES = {353--370},
DOI = {10.2307/1986289},
NOTE = {Errata published in \textit{Trans. Am.
Math. Soc.} \textbf{1}:4 (1900). MR:1500543.
JFM:31.0140.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Isomorphism between certain systems of simple linear groups ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
6 : 8
(1900 ),
pp. 323–328 .
MR
1557719
JFM
31.0139.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In an article in the Bulletin for July, 1899, giving the known finite simple groups, I made the conjecture that the simple quaternary hyperorthogonal group \( HO(4,p^{2n}) \) in the \( \mathit{GF}[p^{2n}] \) was isomorphic with the second hypoabelian group \( SH(6,2^n) \) , the orthogonal group \( O(6,p^n) \) , or the group \( NS(6,p^n) \) , according as \( p^n \) is of the form \( {}2^n \) , \( {}4l - 1 \) , or \( {}4l + 1 \) respectively. For the case [Dickson 1899] \( p^n = 2 \) , and for the case [Dickson 1900] \( p^n = 3 \) , I have proven the conjecture true by setting up abstract groups holoedrically isomorphic with the linear groups in question. The calculations were necessarily long, so that the method of procedure would scarcely be adapted to the case of general \( p^n \) . From the correspondence of generators established in these two special cases, I have been led to the short proof for the general case given in this paper.
@article {key1557719m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Isomorphism between certain systems
of simple linear groups},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {6},
NUMBER = {8},
YEAR = {1900},
PAGES = {323--328},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1900-00713-0},
NOTE = {MR:1557719. JFM:31.0139.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Concerning the cyclic subgroups of the simple group \( G \) of all linear fractional substitutions of determinant unity in two non-homogeneous variables with coefficients in an arbitrary Galois field ,”
Amer. J. Math.
22 : 3
(1900 ),
pp. 231–252 .
MR
1505834
article
BibTeX
@article {key1505834m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Concerning the cyclic subgroups of the
simple group \$G\$ of all linear fractional
substitutions of determinant unity in
two non-homogeneous variables with coefficients
in an arbitrary {G}alois field},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {22},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1900},
PAGES = {231--252},
DOI = {10.2307/2369854},
NOTE = {MR:1505834.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Linear substitutions commutative with a given substitution ,”
Proc. London Math. Soc.
32 : 1
(1900 ),
pp. 165–170 .
MR
1576218
JFM
31.0140.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The object of this note is to determine the explicit form of all \( m \) -ary linear homogeneous substitutions \( T \) with coefficients in the \( GF[p^n] \) which are commutative with a particular one \( S \) . For the case \( n = 1 \) , the number of such substitutions \( T \) has been determined by M. Jordan [1870], whose method of proof was, however, limited to the consideration of a particular example. By the use of convenient notations, we may treat the general case with equal ease and, moreover, avoid the separation of the proof into two successive stages. Following M. Jordan, I first give to \( S \) its canonical form [Dickson 1900] \( S_1 \) .
@article {key1576218m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Linear substitutions commutative with
a given substitution},
JOURNAL = {Proc. London Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Proceedings of the London Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {32},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1900},
PAGES = {165--170},
DOI = {10.1112/plms/s1-32.1.165},
NOTE = {MR:1576218. JFM:31.0140.03.},
ISSN = {0024-6115},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: The elements of the differential and integral calculus ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
6 : 8
(1900 ),
pp. 348–351 .
Book by J. W. A. Young and C. E. Linebarger (Appleton, 1900).
MR
1557724
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1557724m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {T}he elements of the differential
and integral calculus},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {6},
NUMBER = {8},
YEAR = {1900},
PAGES = {348--351},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1900-00723-3},
NOTE = {Book by J.~W.~A. Young and C.~E. Linebarger
(Appleton, 1900). MR:1557724.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Distribution of the ternary linear homogeneous substitutions in a Galois field into complete sets of conjugate substitutions ,”
Amer. J. Math.
23 : 1
(January 1901 ),
pp. 37–40 .
MR
1505848
JFM
32.0134.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The substitutions of the general linear homogeneous group \( G_m \) on \( m \) indices with coefficients in the \( \mathit{GF}[p^n] \) may be classified into complete sets of conjugate substitutions by applying the general theorems given in an earlier paper (American Journal , vol. XXII, pp. 121–137). The classification is based upon the canonical forms of the substitutions of \( G_m \) . The former depend upon the characteristic determinants of the substitutions \( (\alpha_{ij}) \) , viz.:
\begin{align*} \Delta(\lambda) &\equiv \begin{vmatrix} \alpha_{11}-\lambda & \alpha_{12} & \cdots & \alpha_{1m} \\ \alpha_{21} & \alpha_{22}-\lambda & \cdots & \alpha_{2m} \\ \vdots & \vdots & \ddots & \vdots \\ \alpha_{m1} & \alpha_{m2} & \cdots & \alpha_{mm} - \lambda \end{vmatrix} \\ &\equiv (-1)^m(\lambda^m - \alpha_1\lambda^{m-1} - \alpha_2\lambda^{m-2}\cdots -\alpha_m). \end{align*}
Furthermore, \( G_m \) contains a substitution in whose characteristic determinant the coefficients \( \alpha_1 \) , \( \alpha_2,\dots, \) \( \alpha_m \) are arbitrary marks of the \( \mathit{GF}[p^n] \) such that \( \alpha_m\neq 0 \) . The required substitution is
\[ (\alpha_{ij}) \equiv \begin{pmatrix} \alpha_1 & \alpha_2 & \alpha_3 & \cdots & \alpha_{m-1} & \alpha_m \\ 1 & 0 & 0 & \cdots & 0 & 0 \\ 0 & 1 & 0 & \cdots & 0 & 0 \\ \vdots & \vdots & \vdots & \ddots & \vdots & \vdots \\ 0 & 0 & 0 & \cdots & 1 & 0 \end{pmatrix}. \]
The present note considers the case \( m = 3 \) . In the article following this, Mr. Putnam treats the case \( m = 4 \) .
@article {key1505848m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Distribution of the ternary linear homogeneous
substitutions in a {G}alois field into
complete sets of conjugate substitutions},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {23},
NUMBER = {1},
MONTH = {January},
YEAR = {1901},
PAGES = {37--40},
DOI = {10.2307/2369695},
NOTE = {MR:1505848. JFM:32.0134.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On systems of isothermal curves ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
8 : 10
(October 1901 ),
pp. 187–192 .
MR
1515374
JFM
32.0564.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The object of this paper is to give an elementary geometrical definition of a system of isothermal curves in the plane. The definition is readily extended to families of curves on any algebraic surface. For simplicity of expression, the definition is given in connection with the two families of curves which are to be discussed at length; the general definition will then be apparent. The usual methods of treating the subject are indicated in §§4–5.
@article {key1515374m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On systems of isothermal curves},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {8},
NUMBER = {10},
MONTH = {October},
YEAR = {1901},
PAGES = {187--192},
DOI = {10.2307/2971319},
NOTE = {MR:1515374. JFM:32.0564.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
Linear groups with an exposition of the Galois field theory .
Sammlung von Lehrbüchern VI .
B. G. Teubner (Leipzig and Berlin ),
1901 .
Republished in 1958 .
JFM
32.0128.01
book
BibTeX
@book {key32.0128.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Linear groups with an exposition of
the {G}alois field theory},
SERIES = {Sammlung von Lehrb\"uchern},
NUMBER = {VI},
PUBLISHER = {B. G. Teubner},
ADDRESS = {Leipzig and Berlin},
YEAR = {1901},
PAGES = {x+312},
NOTE = {Republished in 1958. JFM:32.0128.01.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The alternating group on eight letters and the quaternary linear congruence group modulo two ,”
Math. Ann.
54 : 4
(1901 ),
pp. 564–569 .
MR
1511128
JFM
32.0130.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Professor Moore has set up an abstract group which is holoedrically isomorphic with the alternating group on \( k \) letters [1896]. A very elementary proof of this result is given in §1. In an article in the Annalen [1898, particularly pp. 435–436] Prof. Moore applied his theorem to prove that the alternating group \( G_{8!/2} \) on \( {}8 \) letters is holoedrically isomorphic with the group \( L \) of linear homogeneous substitutions on \( {}4 \) indices modulo \( {}2 \) . In §2 of this paper is given a much simpler set of substitutions of \( L \) corresponding to the generators of \( G_{8!/2} \) . In §3 these relations are inverted, giving the substitutions of \( G_{8!/2} \) which correspoinid to the simplest generators of \( L \) . We therefore are able to pass readily from any substitution of either of the isomorphic groups to the corresponding substitution of the other.
@article {key1511128m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {The alternating group on eight letters
and the quaternary linear congruence
group modulo two},
JOURNAL = {Math. Ann.},
FJOURNAL = {Mathematische Annalen},
VOLUME = {54},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1901},
PAGES = {564--569},
DOI = {10.1007/BF01450721},
NOTE = {MR:1511128. JFM:32.0130.01.},
ISSN = {0025-5831},
CODEN = {MAANA},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Theory of linear groups in an arbitrary field ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
2 : 4
(1901 ),
pp. 363–394 .
Errata published in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 3 :4 (1902) . French translation published in C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 132 (1901) .
MR
1500573
JFM
32.0131.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Various branches of group theory may be correlated by a treatment of groups of transformations in a given field or domain of rationality. In view of the simplicity of their treatment and of their importance as well in applications as in the general theory, groups of linear transformations offer a natural starting place in the construction of a theory of groups in a given domain of rationality.
The chief result of the present paper is the exhibition of four infinite systems of groups of transformations which are simple groups in every domain of rationality. For the case of the field of all complex numbers these groups are the simple continuous groups of Lie.
@article {key1500573m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Theory of linear groups in an arbitrary
field},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {2},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1901},
PAGES = {363--394},
DOI = {10.2307/1986251},
NOTE = {Errata published in \textit{Trans. Am.
Math. Soc.} \textbf{3}:4 (1902). French
translation published in \textit{C.
R. Acad. Sci. Paris} \textbf{132} (1901).
MR:1500573. JFM:32.0131.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A class of groups in an arbitrary realm connected with the configuration of the \( {}27 \) lines on a cubic surface ,”
Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.
33
(1901 ),
pp. 145–173 .
JFM
32.0133.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key32.0133.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A class of groups in an arbitrary realm
connected with the configuration of
the \${}27\$ lines on a cubic surface},
JOURNAL = {Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Quarterly Journal of Pure and Applied
Mathematics},
VOLUME = {33},
YEAR = {1901},
PAGES = {145--173},
NOTE = {JFM:32.0133.01.},
ISSN = {1549-6724},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Théorie des groupes linéaires dans un domaine arbitraire de rationalité ”
[Theory of linear groups in an arbitrary domain of rationality ],
C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris
132
(1901 ),
pp. 1547–1548 .
French translation of article in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 2 :4 (1901) .
JFM
32.0131.02
article
BibTeX
@article {key32.0131.02j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Th\'eorie des groupes lin\'eaires dans
un domaine arbitraire de rationalit\'e
[Theory of linear groups in an arbitrary
domain of rationality]},
JOURNAL = {C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris},
FJOURNAL = {Comptes Rendus Hebdomadaires des S\'eances
de l'Acad\'emie des Sciences, Paris},
VOLUME = {132},
YEAR = {1901},
PAGES = {1547--1548},
NOTE = {French translation of article in \textit{Trans.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{2}:4 (1901).
JFM:32.0131.02.},
ISSN = {0001-4036},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Concerning real and complex continuous groups ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
7 : 8
(1901 ),
pp. 340–350 .
MR
1557812
JFM
32.0135.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
This paper aims to illustrate certain differences and certain analogies between related real and complex continuous groups. Lie’s theory has been developed chiefly for the latter groups, the modifications necessary for real groups being treated quite briefly.
In §§2–4 are exhibited a real group in \( m \) variables and a real group in \( {}2m \) variables, each of \( m^2 \) parameters, such that the corresponding complex groups are of like structure. In §§5–8, it is shown for \( m = 2 \) that the two real groups have different structures. Of the three proofs given, the first two are analytic and involve little technical knowledge of group theory, while the third group is geometric and gives a better insight into the nature of the question.
In §10, it is illustrated for the case \( m = 2 \) how the general \( m \) -ary linear homogeneous complex continuous group gives rise to an isomorphic \( {}2m \) -ary linear homogeneous real continuous group. Similarly, the complex projective groups lead to groups of birational quadratic transformations.
The investigation has direct contact with the author’s determination [1899] of the structure of the largest group in the \( \mathit{GF}[p^{2n}] \) leaving invariant
\[ \xi_1\overline{\xi_1} + \xi_2\overline{\xi_2} + \cdots + \xi_m\overline{\xi_m} ,\]
where \( \overline{\xi_i} \) is conjugate to \( \xi_i \) with respect to the \( \mathit{GF}[p^n] \) ; also with the paper by Moore [1898] on the universal invariant of finite groups of linear substitutions.
@article {key1557812m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Concerning real and complex continuous
groups},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {7},
NUMBER = {8},
YEAR = {1901},
PAGES = {340--350},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1901-00810-5},
NOTE = {MR:1557812. JFM:32.0135.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Representation of linear groups as transitive substitution groups ,”
Amer. J. Math.
23 : 4
(October 1901 ),
pp. 337–377 .
MR
1505871
JFM
32.0134.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
One of the advantages of the study of groups of congruences and of groups of linear substitutions in a general Galois field is the ability to deal with groups of high order as well as with infinite systems of groups by means of analytic formula involving a small number of variables. The study of finite groups defined analytically has led to such distinctive methods and the results have been given such a degree of generality that there appears to be some justification for the attitude of many specialists in the theory of substitution groups towards the analytic theory. It is hoped that the present investigation will be a first step in the direction of a closer union of these branches of group theory.
After giving in §1 a proof of the known theorem on the representation of certain quotient-groups derived from the general linear group as doubly transitive substitution groups, and an outline in §3 of the general method of the paper for representing the more important classes of special linear groups, I take up the orthogonal groups in §§4–16, the abelian linear group in §§17-20, and, finally, the hypoabelian groups in §§21–26. A similar investigation for the hyperorthogonal linear group [1899] will form part of a paper to be presented to the Annalen .
@article {key1505871m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Representation of linear groups as transitive
substitution groups},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {23},
NUMBER = {4},
MONTH = {October},
YEAR = {1901},
PAGES = {337--377},
DOI = {10.2307/2370134},
NOTE = {MR:1505871. JFM:32.0134.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Concerning the Abelian and related linear groups ,”
Proc. London Math. Soc.
33 : 1
(1901 ),
pp. 313–325 .
MR
1575746
JFM
32.0131.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The object of the paper is to determine by elementary methods a classification of the substitutions of the special Abeliau group of quaternary substitutions modulo \( {}3 \) , \( SA(4,3) \) , into complete sets of conjugates. When, complications are not introduced, the methods are applied to the corresponding group \( SA(4,p^m) \) in the general Galois field; in particular, its substitutions of periods \( {}2 \) and \( {}4 \) are determined (§§2–4). The types of substitutions of period \( {}3 \) in \( SA(4,3^n) \) are determined in §7. In §9 is exhibited a table of the non-conjugate types of substitutions of the group \( SA(4,3) \) , and the number of conjugates to each within the group. This group, \( SA(4,3) \) , is the group for the trisection of the periods of a hyperelliptic function of four periods. The order of \( SA(4,p^n) \) is
\[ p^{4n}(p^{4n}-1)(p^{2n}-1) \]
By a more complicated analysis, depending upon the possible forms of the characteristic determinant of an Abelian substitution, the corresponding problem for \( SA(4,p^n) \) has been solved by the writer [1901]. In the present paper, on the other hand, the classification is based upon the periods of the substitutions.
In §10 is determined the structure of a group whose definition is analogous to that of the Abelian group.
@article {key1575746m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Concerning the {A}belian and related
linear groups},
JOURNAL = {Proc. London Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Proceedings of the London Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {33},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1901},
PAGES = {313--325},
DOI = {10.1112/plms/s1-33.1.313},
NOTE = {MR:1575746. JFM:32.0131.01.},
ISSN = {0024-6115},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Canonical forms of quaternary abelian substitutions in an arbitrary Galois field ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
2 : 2
(1901 ),
pp. 103–138 .
MR
1500559
JFM
32.0130.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
For application to the problem of the distribution of the substitutions of a given group into complete sets of conjugates within the group, a set of canonical forms for its substitutions should have the property that two substitutions are conjugate within the group if, and only if, they are reducible to the same canonical form according to a definite scheme of reduction. In particular, if the canonical form belongs to a higher field than the initial \( \mathit{GF}[p^n] \) , the new indices introduced must be conjugate with respect to the initial field.
In the present paper is given a set of canonical forms of quaternary abelian substitutions in the \( \mathit{GF}[p^n] \) such that the canonical forms likewise belong to the special abelian group \( SA(4,p^n) \) , the reduction being effected within the group. From them are derived the ultimate canonical forms, not all belonging to the given abelian group. In the former case, the canonical forms depend on the coefficients of the characteristic equation, in the latter case upon its roots .
@article {key1500559m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Canonical forms of quaternary abelian
substitutions in an arbitrary {G}alois
field},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {2},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1901},
PAGES = {103--138},
DOI = {10.2307/1986213},
NOTE = {MR:1500559. JFM:32.0130.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The configurations of the \( {}27 \) lines on a cubic surface and the \( {}28 \) bitangents to a quartic curve ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
8 : 2
(1901 ),
pp. 63–70 .
MR
1557844
JFM
32.0492.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
After determining four systems of simple groups in an arbitrary domain of rationality which include the four systems of simple continuous groups of Lie, the writer was led to consider the analogous problem for the five isolated simple continuous groups of \( {}14 \) , \( {}52 \) , \( {}78 \) , \( {}133 \) , and \( {}248 \) parameters. The groups of \( {}78 \) and \( {}133 \) parameters are related to certain interesting forms of the third and fourth degrees respectively. They suggested the forms \( C \) (§1) and \( Q \) (§3).
It is shown in §1 that the cubic form \( C \) defines the configuration of the \( {}27 \) straight lines on a cubic surface in ordinary space. After proving this result, the writer observed that the formulae remained unaltered if the notation for the variables was chosen to be \( x_i \) , \( y_i \) , \( z_{ij}\equiv z_{ji} \) (\( i,j = 1,\dots, \) \( {}6 \) ; \( j\neq i \) ) , a notation given by Burkhardt [1893, p. 339]. The notation (1) has been retained in view of the relation with the later sections and to retain uniformity with the notation of a paper [Dickson 1901] on the transformation group defined by the invariant \( C \) for an arbitrary domain of rationality. The group of the configuration of the \( {}27 \) lines on a cubic surface is exhibited in §2. A study of the quartic form \( Q \) and the group of the configuration defined by it is made in §§3–6.
@article {key1557844m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The configurations of the \${}27\$ lines
on a cubic surface and the \${}28\$ bitangents
to a quartic curve},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {8},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1901},
PAGES = {63--70},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1901-00855-5},
NOTE = {MR:1557844. JFM:32.0492.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Errata: ‘The groups of Steiner in problems of contact’ ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
3 : 4
(October 1902 ),
pp. 500 .
Errata for article in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 3 :1 (1902) .
MR
1500454
article
BibTeX
@article {key1500454m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Errata: ``{T}he groups of {S}teiner
in problems of contact''},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {3},
NUMBER = {4},
MONTH = {October},
YEAR = {1902},
PAGES = {500},
DOI = {10.2307/1986473},
NOTE = {Errata for article in \textit{Trans.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{3}:1 (1902).
MR:1500454.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Errata: ‘Theory of linear groups in an arbitrary field’ ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
3 : 4
(October 1902 ),
pp. 500 .
Errata for article in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 2 :4 (1901) .
MR
1500452
article
BibTeX
@article {key1500452m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Errata: ``{T}heory of linear groups
in an arbitrary field''},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {3},
NUMBER = {4},
MONTH = {October},
YEAR = {1902},
PAGES = {500},
DOI = {10.2307/1986473},
NOTE = {Errata for article in \textit{Trans.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{2}:4 (1901).
MR:1500452.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A class of simply transitive linear groups ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
8 : 9
(1902 ),
pp. 394–401 .
MR
1557918
JFM
33.0153.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1557918m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A class of simply transitive linear
groups},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {8},
NUMBER = {9},
YEAR = {1902},
PAGES = {394--401},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1902-00919-1},
NOTE = {MR:1557918. JFM:33.0153.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A matrix defined by the quaternion group ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
9 : 11
(November 1902 ),
pp. 243–248 .
MR
1515712
JFM
34.0185.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The Quaternion Group was chosen by Weber [1899, vol. 2, pp. 216–218, 125–128] to illustrate his exposition of a portion of Frobenius’s thoery of group-matrices and group-determinants [Dickson 1902a]. In his treatment of the illustrative example, Weber gives no clue to the reader how his results were obtained originally and makes the verification depend upon two laborious compositions of matrices of order eight. The example may, however, be treated very simply by a method which emphasizes certain remarkable properties enjoyed by group-matrices.
A second purpose of this paper is to furnish an instructive example of the theory of group-matrices as generalized for an arbitrary field (Körper, realm of ratioinality) by the writer [1902b]. The canonical formas are essentially differnt in the cases of a field having modulus \( {}2 \) and a field not having modulus \( {}2 \) . The methods used are elementary and the paper is entirely independent of those cited. Incidentally, it illustrates a method of factoring important determinants.
@article {key1515712m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A matrix defined by the quaternion group},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {9},
NUMBER = {11},
MONTH = {November},
YEAR = {1902},
PAGES = {243--248},
DOI = {10.2307/2971280},
NOTE = {MR:1515712. JFM:34.0185.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
College algebra .
J. Wiley & Sons (New York ),
1902 .
JFM
33.0188.04
book
BibTeX
@book {key33.0188.04j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {College algebra},
PUBLISHER = {J. Wiley \& Sons},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1902},
PAGES = {vii+214},
NOTE = {JFM:33.0188.04.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Éléments de la théorie des nombres ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
8 : 6
(1902 ),
pp. 257–259 .
Book by E. Cahen (Gauthier-Villars, 1900).
MR
1557888
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1557888m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: \'{E}l\'ements de la th\'eorie
des nombres},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {8},
NUMBER = {6},
YEAR = {1902},
PAGES = {257--259},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1902-00889-6},
NOTE = {Book by E.~Cahen (Gauthier-Villars,
1900). MR:1557888.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Geometric derivation of certain trigonometric formulae ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
9 : 2
(February 1902 ),
pp. 36–37 .
MR
1515484
article
BibTeX
@article {key1515484m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Geometric derivation of certain trigonometric
formulae},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {9},
NUMBER = {2},
MONTH = {February},
YEAR = {1902},
PAGES = {36--37},
DOI = {10.2307/2967670},
NOTE = {MR:1515484.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The order of a certain senary linear group ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
9 : 6–7
(June–July 1902 ),
pp. 149–152 .
MR
1515614
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In the March number of the Monthly , the writer determined the factors determinant \( D \) of a certain square matrix of order six:
\[ \begin{vmatrix} I & \alpha & \beta & \gamma & \delta & \epsilon \\ \beta & I & \alpha & \delta & \epsilon & \gamma \\ \alpha & \beta & I & \epsilon & \gamma & \delta \\ \gamma & \delta & \epsilon & I & \alpha & \beta \\ \delta & \epsilon & \gamma & \beta & I & \alpha \\ \epsilon & \gamma & \delta & \alpha & \beta & I \end{vmatrix} \]
It is readily shown that the product of two such matrices is a third matrix of the same form. Hence, if we assign to \( I \) , \( \alpha \) , \( \beta \) , \( \gamma \) , \( \delta \) , \( \epsilon \) all sets of values in a given field, such that \( D \) does not equal \( {}0 \) , we obtain a set of matrices having the group property. The group may be represented concretely as a linear homogeneous group in six variables. It is proposed to determine the order of this group in the Galois Field of order \( p^n \) , designated \( \mathit{GF}[p^n] \) .
@article {key1515614m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The order of a certain senary linear
group},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {9},
NUMBER = {6--7},
MONTH = {June--July},
YEAR = {1902},
PAGES = {149--152},
DOI = {10.2307/2968813},
NOTE = {MR:1515614.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Theorems on the residues of multinomial coefficients with respect to a prime modulus ,”
Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.
33
(1902 ),
pp. 378–384 .
JFM
33.0203.02
article
BibTeX
@article {key33.0203.02j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Theorems on the residues of multinomial
coefficients with respect to a prime
modulus},
JOURNAL = {Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Quarterly Journal of Pure and Applied
Mathematics},
VOLUME = {33},
YEAR = {1902},
PAGES = {378--384},
NOTE = {JFM:33.0203.02.},
ISSN = {1549-6724},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Linear groups in an infinite field ,”
Proc. London Math. Soc.
34 : 1
(1902 ),
pp. 185–205 .
MR
1575497
JFM
33.0152.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
@article {key1575497m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Linear groups in an infinite field},
JOURNAL = {Proc. London Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Proceedings of the London Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {34},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1902},
PAGES = {185--205},
DOI = {10.1112/plms/s1-34.1.185},
NOTE = {MR:1575497. JFM:33.0152.01.},
ISSN = {0024-6115},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the group defined for any given field by the multiplication table of any given finite group ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
3 : 3
(1902 ),
pp. 285–301 .
MR
1500600
JFM
33.0150.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In two papers [1898], each having the title “On the Continuous Group that is defined by any given Group of Finite Order,” Burnside establishes certain results of decided interest and importance, among them being the theorems of Frobenius [1896] on the irreducible factors of group-determinants. The object of this paper is the development of the theory of analogous groups in any arbitrary field or domain of rationality. In particular, when the field is the general Galois field of order \( p^n \) , we obtain a doubly-infinite system of finite groups corresponding to each given finite group. An exceptional case not treated here is that of a field having a modulus which is a factor of the order of the given finite group.
@article {key1500600m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {On the group defined for any given field
by the multiplication table of any given
finite group},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {3},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1902},
PAGES = {285--301},
DOI = {10.2307/1986379},
NOTE = {MR:1500600. JFM:33.0150.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The groups of Steiner in problems of contact (Second paper) ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
3 : 3
(July 1902 ),
pp. 377–382 .
The original article was published in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 3 :1 (1902) .
MR
1500607
JFM
33.0153.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Denote by \( G \) the group of the equation upon which depends the determination of the curves of order \( n-3 \) having simple contact at \( n(n-3)/2 \) points with a given curve \( C_n \) of order \( n \) having no double points. The case in which \( n \) is odd was discussed in the former paper (Transactions , January, 1902) and \( G \) was shown to be a subgroup of the group defined by the invariants \( \phi_3 \) , \( \phi_4 \) , \( \phi_5, \dots, \) the latter group being holoedrically isomorphic with the first hypoabelian group on \( {}2p \) indices with coefficients taken modulo \( {}2 \) . For \( n \) even, \( G \) is contained in the group \( H \) defined by the invariants \( \phi_4 \) , \( \phi_6,\dots, \) with even subscripts. Jordan has shown (Traité , pp. 229–242) that \( H \) is holoedrically isomorphic with the abelian linear group \( A \) on \( {}2p \) indices with coefficients taken modulo \( {}2 \) . The object of the present paper is to establish the latter theorem by a short, elementary proof, which makes no use of the abstract substitutions \( [\alpha_1 \) , \( \beta_1,\dots, \) \( \alpha_p \) , \( \beta_p] \) of Jordan, and which exhibits explicitly the correspondence between the substitutions of the isomorphic groups.
@article {key1500607m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {The groups of {S}teiner in problems
of contact ({S}econd paper)},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {3},
NUMBER = {3},
MONTH = {July},
YEAR = {1902},
PAGES = {377--382},
DOI = {10.2307/1986386},
NOTE = {The original article was published in
\textit{Trans. Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{3}:1
(1902). MR:1500607. JFM:33.0153.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The hyperorthogonal groups ,”
Math. Ann.
55 : 4
(1902 ),
pp. 521–572 .
MR
1511162
JFM
33.0151.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In volume 52 of the Annalen , the writer investigated the linear homogeneous groups defined by an invariant
\[ \lambda_1\xi_1^r + \lambda_2\xi_2^r + \cdots + \lambda_m\xi_m^r \]
and showed that, for \( r > 2 \) , the structures of such groups in any Galois Field depend upon the structure of the group in the Galois Field of order \( p^{2s} \) defined by the invariant
\[ \xi_1^{p^s+1}+\cdots + \xi_m^{p^s+1} .\]
Using the results there obtained for the order, generators and structure of the latter group, the present paper investigates the character of its substitutions and their distribution into sets of conjugates within the group.
@article {key1511162m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {The hyperorthogonal groups},
JOURNAL = {Math. Ann.},
FJOURNAL = {Mathematische Annalen},
VOLUME = {55},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1902},
PAGES = {521--572},
DOI = {10.1007/BF01450352},
NOTE = {MR:1511162. JFM:33.0151.02.},
ISSN = {0025-5831},
CODEN = {MAANA},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Ninth summer meeting of the American Mathematical Society ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
9 : 8–9
(August–September 1902 ),
pp. 185–187 .
MR
1515644
article
BibTeX
@article {key1515644m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Ninth summer meeting of the {A}merican
{M}athematical {S}ociety},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {9},
NUMBER = {8--9},
MONTH = {August--September},
YEAR = {1902},
PAGES = {185--187},
DOI = {10.2307/2971380},
NOTE = {MR:1515644.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Factors of a certain determinant of order six ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
9 : 3
(March 1902 ),
pp. 66–68 .
MR
1515512
article
BibTeX
@article {key1515512m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Factors of a certain determinant of
order six},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {9},
NUMBER = {3},
MONTH = {March},
YEAR = {1902},
PAGES = {66--68},
DOI = {10.2307/2970098},
NOTE = {MR:1515512.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Errata: ‘Canonical forms of quaternary abelian substitutions in an arbitrary Galois field’ ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
3 : 4
(1902 ),
pp. 499 .
Errata for article in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 2 :2 (1901) .
MR
1500448
article
BibTeX
@article {key1500448m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Errata: ``{C}anonical forms of quaternary
abelian substitutions in an arbitrary
{G}alois field''},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {3},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1902},
PAGES = {499},
DOI = {10.2307/1986473},
NOTE = {Errata for article in \textit{Trans.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{2}:2 (1901).
MR:1500448.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The groups of Steiner in problems of contact ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
3 : 1
(1902 ),
pp. 38–45 .
A second article with this title was published in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 3 :3 (1902) . Errata were published in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 3 :4 (1902) .
MR
1500585
JFM
33.0153.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The problems of contact discussed by Steiner [1855] and Hesse [1855] were investigated from a more general standpoint by Clebsch in his paper [1864] on the application of Abelian functions to geometry. A study of the groups of these geometrical problems has been made by Jordan [1870, pp. 329–333, pp. 305–308, pp. 229–249]. One of the most interesting of these groups was shown by Jordan to be holoedrically isomorphic with the first hypoabelian linear group, which plays so important a rôle in various geometrical questions and in the problem of the construction of all solvable groups. As the proof (Traité , pp. 229–249) is quite complicated, it seemed to the writer worth while to publish the elementary proof given below of the isomorphism in question. No use will be made of the Jordan substitutions \( [\alpha_1 \) , \( \beta_1,\dots, \) \( \alpha_p \) , \( \beta_p] \) , neither the origin nor the interpretation of which is apparent.
@article {key1500585m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {The groups of {S}teiner in problems
of contact},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {3},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1902},
PAGES = {38--45},
DOI = {10.2307/1986314},
NOTE = {A second article with this title was
published in \textit{Trans. Am. Math.
Soc.} \textbf{3}:3 (1902). Errata were
published in \textit{Trans. Am. Math.
Soc.} \textbf{3}:4 (1902). MR:1500585.
JFM:33.0153.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Essays on the theory of numbers: I: Continuity and irrational numbers, II: The nature and meaning of numbers ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
8 : 6
(1902 ),
pp. 259–260 .
Book by R. Dedekind (Open Court, 1901).
MR
1557889
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1557889m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {E}ssays on the theory
of numbers: {I}: {C}ontinuity and irrational
numbers, {II}: {T}he nature and meaning
of numbers},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {8},
NUMBER = {6},
YEAR = {1902},
PAGES = {259--260},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1902-00891-4},
NOTE = {Book by R.~Dedekind (Open Court, 1901).
MR:1557889.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Canonical form of a linear homogeneous transformation in an arbitrary realm of rationality ,”
Amer. J. Math.
24 : 2
(April 1902 ),
pp. 101–108 .
MR
1507871
JFM
33.0151.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In volume XXII of the American Journal of Mathematics , the writer investigated the canonical forms of linear homogeneous transformations in a finite field (necessarily a Galois Field). It was shown that the type of canonical field obtained by M. Jordan for the case of the field of integers taken modulo \( p \) is capable of immediate generalization to an arbitrary Galois Field. Instead of the direct, but lengthy, method of proof employed by M. Jordan, the paper cited gives a proof of induction from a smaller to a greater number of irreducible factors of the characteristic determinant. The latter method leads to a canonical form of linear transformations in an arbitrary field \( F \) . The formal process of reduction is the same as in the case of a Galois Field [1900]. But the proof that the reduced form has the desired properties is necessarily more complicated for the general field \( F \) than for a Galois Field. Indeed, the content of the theorem is essentially greater for the general field, since the roots of an equation \( F(K) = 0 \) , belonging to and irreducible in \( F \) , may not all be rational functions in \( F \) of a single root, as is the case when \( F \) is a Galois Field (see §4). The object of this paper is to give the desired additional proof and thereby establish the validity of the canonical form for an arbitrary field. In §6 is given an example to illustrate the generalized theorem.
@article {key1507871m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Canonical form of a linear homogeneous
transformation in an arbitrary realm
of rationality},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {24},
NUMBER = {2},
MONTH = {April},
YEAR = {1902},
PAGES = {101--108},
DOI = {10.2307/2369965},
NOTE = {MR:1507871. JFM:33.0151.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Cyclic subgroups of the simple ternary linear fractional group in a Galois field ,”
Amer. J. Math.
24 : 1
(January 1902 ),
pp. 1–12 .
MR
1505877
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The present paper is an addition to the writer’s article (American Journal , vol. XXII, pp. 231–252). It gives proofs of the results there stated in §§13–14 (pp. 249–251) and certain new theorems related to them. The question concerns the substitutions
\begin{align*} x^{\prime} &= \alpha^r x,\\ y^{\prime} &= \alpha^s y,\\ z^{\prime} &= \alpha^{-r-s}z, \end{align*}
where \( \alpha \) is a primitive root of the Galois Field of order \( p^n \) . Two cases arise according to the value of the greatest common divisor \( d \) of \( {}3 \) and \( p^n - 1 \) .
@article {key1505877m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Cyclic subgroups of the simple ternary
linear fractional group in a {G}alois
field},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {24},
NUMBER = {1},
MONTH = {January},
YEAR = {1902},
PAGES = {1--12},
DOI = {10.2307/2370004},
NOTE = {MR:1505877.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The known systems of simple groups and their inter-isomorphisms ,”
pp. 225–229
in
Compte rendu du deuxième Congrès International des Mathématiciens
(Paris, August 6–12, 1900 ).
Edited by E. Duporcq .
Gauthier-Villars (Paris ),
1902 .
JFM
32.0136.01
incollection
People
BibTeX
@incollection {key32.0136.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The known systems of simple groups and
their inter-isomorphisms},
BOOKTITLE = {Compte rendu du deuxi\`eme Congr\`es
International des Math\'ematiciens},
EDITOR = {Duporcq, Ernest},
PUBLISHER = {Gauthier-Villars},
ADDRESS = {Paris},
YEAR = {1902},
PAGES = {225--229},
URL = {http://ada00.math.uni-bielefeld.de/ICM/ICM1900/Main/icm1900.0225.0230.ocr.pdf},
NOTE = {(Paris, August 6--12, 1900). JFM:32.0136.01.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“An elementary exposition of Frobenius’s theory of group-characters and group-determinants ,”
Ann. Math. (2)
4 : 1
(1902 ),
pp. 25–49 .
MR
1502293
JFM
33.0149.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In a series of recent memoirs [1896a, 1896b, 1897, 1898, 1899] in the Berliner Sitzungsberichte , Frobenius has developed an elaborate theory which has already attracted considerable attention, both on account of the beauty of the results and of its importance in various applications.
The present paper presents the chief results due to Frobenius and follows his methods as closely as an elementary treatment will admit. Symbolic notations are avoided and the material is presented with considerable detail, a number of illustrative examples being worked out. The paper is practically self-contained, involving no dependence upon technical branches of mathematics.
@article {key1502293m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {An elementary exposition of {F}robenius's
theory of group-characters and group-determinants},
JOURNAL = {Ann. Math. (2)},
FJOURNAL = {Annals of Mathematics. Second Series},
VOLUME = {4},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1902},
PAGES = {25--49},
DOI = {10.2307/1967149},
NOTE = {MR:1502293. JFM:33.0149.03.},
ISSN = {0003-486X},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Three sets of generational relations defining the abstract simple group of order \( {}504 \) ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
9 : 4
(1903 ),
pp. 194–204 .
MR
1557975
JFM
34.0166.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1557975m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Three sets of generational relations
defining the abstract simple group of
order \${}504\$},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {9},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1903},
PAGES = {194--204},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1903-00976-8},
NOTE = {MR:1557975. JFM:34.0166.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Generational relations defining the abstract simple group of order \( {}660 \) ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
9 : 4
(1903 ),
pp. 204–206 .
MR
1557976
JFM
34.0166.02
article
BibTeX
@article {key1557976m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Generational relations defining the
abstract simple group of order \${}660\$},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {9},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1903},
PAGES = {204--206},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1903-00977-X},
NOTE = {MR:1557976. JFM:34.0166.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Definitions of a linear associative algebra by independent postulates ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
4 : 1
(1903 ),
pp. 21–26 .
MR
1500620
JFM
34.0090.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The term linear associative algebra , introduced by Benjamin Peirce, has the same significance as the term system of (higher) complex numbers . In the usual theory of complex numbers, the coördinates are either real numbers or else ordinary complex quantities. To avoid the resulting double phraseology and to attain an evident generalization of the theory, I shall here consider systems of complex numbers whose coördinates belong to an arbitrary field \( F \) .
I first give the usual definition by means of a multiplication table for the \( n \) units of the system. It employs three postulates, shown to be independent, relating to \( n^3 \) elements of the field \( F \) .
The second definition is of abstract character. It employs four independent postulates which completely define a system of complex numbers.
The first definition may also be presented in the abstract form used for the second, namely, without the explicit use of units. The second definition may also be presented by means of units. Even aside from the difference in the form of their presentation, the two definitions are essentially different.
@article {key1500620m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Definitions of a linear associative
algebra by independent postulates},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {4},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1903},
PAGES = {21--26},
DOI = {10.2307/1986447},
NOTE = {MR:1500620. JFM:34.0090.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the groups defined for an arbitrary field by the multiplication tables of certain finite groups ,”
Proc. London Math. Soc.
35 : 1
(1903 ),
pp. 68–80 .
MR
1577021
JFM
34.0164.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1577021m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On the groups defined for an arbitrary
field by the multiplication tables of
certain finite groups},
JOURNAL = {Proc. London Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Proceedings of the London Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {35},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1903},
PAGES = {68--80},
DOI = {10.1112/plms/s1-35.1.68},
NOTE = {MR:1577021. JFM:34.0164.01.},
ISSN = {0024-6115},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A generalization of symmetric and skew-symmetric determinants ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
10 : 12
(December 1903 ),
pp. 253–256 .
MR
1516012
article
BibTeX
@article {key1516012m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A generalization of symmetric and skew-symmetric
determinants},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {10},
NUMBER = {12},
MONTH = {December},
YEAR = {1903},
PAGES = {253--256},
DOI = {10.2307/2969591},
NOTE = {MR:1516012.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Fields whose elements are linear differential expressions ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
10 : 1
(1903 ),
pp. 30–31 .
MR
1558044
JFM
34.0172.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1558044m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Fields whose elements are linear differential
expressions},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {10},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1903},
PAGES = {30--31},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1903-01064-7},
NOTE = {MR:1558044. JFM:34.0172.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the subgroups of order a power of \( p \) in the quaternary abelian group in the Galois field of order \( p^n \) ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
4 : 4
(October 1903 ),
pp. 371–386 .
Errata published in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 5 :4 (1904) .
MR
1500648
JFM
34.0167.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The problem of the \( p \) -section of the periods of hyperelliptic functions of four periods leads to the quaternary abelian group modulo \( p \) , where \( p \) is supposed to be an odd prime number. The equation for this \( p \) -section has two essentially distinct resolvents of degree \( (p^4-1)/(p-1) \) , as shown by Jordan [1870a, Note E, p. 666; 1870b; 1870c] and as follows incidentally in the present paper, §§2, 4 (Corollary), 16.
For the case \( p=3 \) , the group arises in the problem of the \( {}27 \) lines on an general cubic surface, as well as in the reduction of a binary sextic to Cayley’s canonical form \( T^2 - U^3 \) .
The question of the existence of resolvents of degree lower than that mentioned above and the related, but more general, problem of the determination of all the subgroups of the abelian group form the subject of investigations now in progress by the writer. On account of the great complexity of these problems only small values of \( p \) are being considered. The discussions for the various values of \( p \) have at least one question in common, that of the subgroups of order a power of \( p \) . To avoid duplication, this question is here treated for general \( p \) , together with a number of related questions.
@article {key1500648m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {On the subgroups of order a power of
\$p\$ in the quaternary abelian group
in the {G}alois field of order \$p^n\$},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {4},
NUMBER = {4},
MONTH = {October},
YEAR = {1903},
PAGES = {371--386},
DOI = {10.2307/1986407},
NOTE = {Errata published in \textit{Trans. Am.
Math. Soc.} \textbf{5}:4 (1904). MR:1500648.
JFM:34.0167.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Definitions of a field by independent postulates ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
4 : 1
(1903 ),
pp. 13–20 .
Errata published in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 5 :4 (1904) .
MR
1500619
JFM
34.0160.02
article
BibTeX
@article {key1500619m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Definitions of a field by independent
postulates},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {4},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1903},
PAGES = {13--20},
DOI = {10.2307/1986446},
NOTE = {Errata published in \textit{Trans. Am.
Math. Soc.} \textbf{5}:4 (1904). MR:1500619.
JFM:34.0160.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
Introduction to the theory of algebraic equations .
J. Wiley & Sons (New York ),
1903 .
JFM
34.0210.03
book
BibTeX
@book {key34.0210.03j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Introduction to the theory of algebraic
equations},
PUBLISHER = {J. Wiley \& Sons},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1903},
PAGES = {v+104},
NOTE = {JFM:34.0210.03.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The abstract group \( G \) simply isomorphic with the alternating group on six letters ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
9 : 6
(1903 ),
pp. 303–306 .
MR
1557995
JFM
34.0167.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1557995m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The abstract group \$G\$ simply isomorphic
with the alternating group on six letters},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {9},
NUMBER = {6},
YEAR = {1903},
PAGES = {303--306},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1903-00996-3},
NOTE = {MR:1557995. JFM:34.0167.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The abstract group simply isomorphic with the group of linear fractional transformations in a Galois field ,”
Proc. London Math. Soc.
35 : 1
(1903 ),
pp. 292–305 .
MR
1576999
JFM
34.0165.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The object of this paper is the determination of a simple set of generational relations for the abstract group \( G_{(1/2)p^n(p^{2n}-1)} \) simply isomorphic with the group of all linear fractional transformations on one variable with coefficients belonging to the \( GF[p^n] \) , \( p > 2 \) , and having determinant unity. The group is known to be simple, except for \( p^n = 3 \) .
@article {key1576999m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The abstract group simply isomorphic
with the group of linear fractional
transformations in a {G}alois field},
JOURNAL = {Proc. London Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Proceedings of the London Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {35},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1903},
PAGES = {292--305},
DOI = {10.1112/plms/s1-35.1.292},
NOTE = {MR:1576999. JFM:34.0165.01.},
ISSN = {0024-6115},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the reducibility of linear groups ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
4 : 4
(1903 ),
pp. 434–436 .
MR
1500653
JFM
34.0168.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The object of this note is a two-fold generalization of Loewy’s theorem proved in these Transactions , vol. 4, pp. 171–177. The generalized theorem is as follows:
Let \( G \) be a group of linear homogeneous transformations with coefficients in a domain \( F \) , such that \( G \) is irreducible in \( F \) but is reducible in the domain \( F(\rho_0) \) given by the extension of \( F \) by the adjunction of a root \( \rho_0 \) of an equation belonging to and irreducible in \( F \) and having as its roots \( \rho_0 \) , \( \rho_1,\dots, \) \( \rho_{r-1} \) . Then \( G \) can be transformed linearly into a decomposable group
\[ \begin{array}{ccccc} G_{11} & 0 & 0 & \cdots & 0\\ 0 & G^{\prime}_{11} & 0 & \cdots & 0\\ 0 & 0 & G^{\prime\prime}_{11} & \cdots & 0\\ \vdots & \vdots & \vdots & \ddots & \vdots\\ 0 & 0 & 0 & \cdots & G_{11}^{(r-1)} \end{array} \]
where \( G_{11}^{(s)} \) is a group irreducible in \( F(\rho_s) \) with coefficients not all in \( F \) , and \( G_{11} \) , \( G^{\prime}_{11}, \dots, \) \( G_{11}^{(r-1)} \) are conjugate with respect to \( F \) .
@article {key1500653m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {On the reducibility of linear groups},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {4},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1903},
PAGES = {434--436},
DOI = {10.2307/1986412},
NOTE = {MR:1500653. JFM:34.0168.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Generational relations of an abstract simple group of order \( {}4080 \) ,”
Proc. London Math. Soc.
35 : 1
(1903 ),
pp. 306–319 .
MR
1577001
JFM
34.0165.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In an earlier paper in these Proceedings , Vol. XXXV, pp. 292–305, the writer investigated, for the case \( p > 2 \) , the abstract group \( G \) simply isomorphic with the group \( \Gamma \) of all linear fractional transformations of determinant unity in the \( GF[p^n] \) . The present paper deals with the case \( p = 2 \) , when the group \( \Gamma \) is of order \( {}2^n(2^{2n}-1) \) , and is simple if \( n > 1 \) . Use is made of the transformations
\begin{align*} T: z^{\prime} &= \frac{1}{z};\\ S_{\lambda}: z^{\prime} &= z + \lambda. \end{align*}
@article {key1577001m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Generational relations of an abstract
simple group of order \${}4080\$},
JOURNAL = {Proc. London Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Proceedings of the London Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {35},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1903},
PAGES = {306--319},
DOI = {10.1112/plms/s1-35.1.306},
NOTE = {MR:1577001. JFM:34.0165.02.},
ISSN = {0024-6115},
}
L. E. Dickson :
Ternary orthogonal group in a general field .
University of Chigago Press ,
1903 .
This monograph and Groups defined for a general field by the rotation groups (1903) were published together in 1904 as a single book .
JFM
34.0162.02
book
BibTeX
@book {key34.0162.02j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Ternary orthogonal group in a general
field},
PUBLISHER = {University of Chigago Press},
YEAR = {1903},
PAGES = {8},
NOTE = {This monograph and \textit{Groups defined
for a general field by the rotation
groups} (1903) were published together
in 1904 as a single book. JFM:34.0162.02.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Three algebraic notes ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
10 : 10
(October 1903 ),
pp. 219–226 .
MR
1515976
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Transformation of a solvable quintic into itself.
Reducibility of a reciprocal sextic equation.
The general term of a recurring series.
@article {key1515976m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Three algebraic notes},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {10},
NUMBER = {10},
MONTH = {October},
YEAR = {1903},
PAGES = {219--226},
DOI = {10.2307/2969177},
NOTE = {MR:1515976.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
Groups defined for a general field by the rotation groups .
University of Chigago Press ,
1903 .
This monograph and Ternary orthogonal group in a general field (1903) were published together in 1904 as a single book .
JFM
34.0163.01
book
BibTeX
@book {key34.0163.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Groups defined for a general field by
the rotation groups},
PUBLISHER = {University of Chigago Press},
YEAR = {1903},
PAGES = {17},
NOTE = {This monograph and \textit{Ternary orthogonal
group in a general field} (1903) were
published together in 1904 as a single
book. JFM:34.0163.01.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Generational relations for the abstract group simply isomorphic with the linear fractional group in the \( GF[2^n] \) ,”
Proc. London Math. Soc.
35 : 1
(1903 ),
pp. 443–454 .
MR
1577013
JFM
34.0167.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
@article {key1577013m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Generational relations for the abstract
group simply isomorphic with the linear
fractional group in the \$GF[2^n]\$},
JOURNAL = {Proc. London Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Proceedings of the London Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {35},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1903},
PAGES = {443--454},
DOI = {10.1112/plms/s1-35.1.443},
NOTE = {MR:1577013. JFM:34.0167.02.},
ISSN = {0024-6115},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Niedere Zahlentheorie, erster Teil ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
9 : 10
(1903 ),
pp. 555–556 .
Book by P. Bachmann (Teubner, 1902).
MR
1558032
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1558032m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {N}iedere {Z}ahlentheorie,
erster {T}eil},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {9},
NUMBER = {10},
YEAR = {1903},
PAGES = {555--556},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1903-01031-3},
NOTE = {Book by P.~Bachmann (Teubner, 1902).
MR:1558032.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Liniengeometrie mit Anwendungen ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
9 : 10
(1903 ),
pp. 561–562 .
Book by K. Zindler (Göschen, 1902).
MR
1558036
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1558036m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {L}iniengeometrie mit {A}nwendungen},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {9},
NUMBER = {10},
YEAR = {1903},
PAGES = {561--562},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1903-01037-4},
NOTE = {Book by K.~Zindler (G\"oschen, 1902).
MR:1558036.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Éléments de la théorie des groupes abstraits ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
11 : 3
(1904 ),
pp. 159–162 .
Book by J.-A. de Séguier (Gauthier-Villars, 1904).
MR
1558181
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1558181m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: \'{E}l\'ements de la th\'eorie
des groupes abstraits},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {11},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1904},
PAGES = {159--162},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1904-01201-X},
NOTE = {Book by J.-A.~de S\'eguier (Gauthier-Villars,
1904). MR:1558181.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: An introduction to the modern theory of equations ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
11 : 3
(1904 ),
pp. 163–164 .
Book by F. Cajori (Macmillan, 1904).
MR
1558182
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1558182m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {A}n introduction to the
modern theory of equations},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {11},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1904},
PAGES = {163--164},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1904-01203-3},
NOTE = {Book by F.~Cajori (Macmillan, 1904).
MR:1558182.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Determination of all the subgroups of the known simple group of order \( {}25920 \) ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
5 : 2
(April 1904 ),
pp. 126–166 .
Errata were published in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 5 :4 (1904) .
MR
1500666
JFM
35.0167.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The trisection of the periods of hyperelliptic functions of four periods, the determination of the \( {}27 \) lines on a general cubic surface, and the reduction of a binary sextic to the canonical \( T^2-U^3 \) , although apparently unrelated, are not essentially distinct problems from the standpoint of group-theory, since each is readily reduced to the solution of an algebraic equation whose Galois group is the same simple group of order \( {}25920 \) . This equation has been shown to possess resolvents of degrees \( {}27 \) , \( {}36 \) , \( {}40 \) (two essentially distinct ones), and \( {}45 \) , but none of degree \( {} < 27 \) . The last result was established by Jordan [1870] by an elaborate discussion based on Galois’ theory of algebraic equations. This result is reëstablished in the present paper, which employs only pure group-theory. All the results mentioned follow from the fundamental theorem (not stated heretofore) that all the maximal subgroups of the simple \( G_{25920} \) are conjugate with \( G_{960} \) , \( G_{720} \) , \( G_{648} \) , \( H_{648} \) , or \( G_{576} \) (§70). These five groups, appearing in different notations, play a fundamental rôle in the memoirs of Witting and Burkhardt on the geometric and function-theoretic phases of the subject.
@article {key1500666m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Determination of all the subgroups of
the known simple group of order \${}25920\$},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {5},
NUMBER = {2},
MONTH = {April},
YEAR = {1904},
PAGES = {126--166},
DOI = {10.2307/1986425},
NOTE = {Errata were published in \textit{Trans.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{5}:4 (1904).
MR:1500666. JFM:35.0167.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Two systems of subgroups of the quaternary Abelian group in a general Galois field ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
10 : 4
(1904 ),
pp. 178–184 .
MR
1558086
JFM
35.0169.02
article
BibTeX
@article {key1558086m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Two systems of subgroups of the quaternary
{A}belian group in a general {G}alois
field},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {10},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1904},
PAGES = {178--184},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1904-01085-X},
NOTE = {MR:1558086. JFM:35.0169.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
1: Ternary orthogonal groups in a general field. 2: The groups defined for a general field by the rotation group.
University of Chigago Press ,
1904 .
Combined republication of the monographs Ternary orthogonal group in a general field (1903) and Groups defined for a general field by the rotation groups (1903) .
JFM
35.0181.04
book
BibTeX
@book {key35.0181.04j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {1: {T}ernary orthogonal groups in a
general field. 2: {T}he groups defined
for a general field by the rotation
group.},
PUBLISHER = {University of Chigago Press},
YEAR = {1904},
PAGES = {26},
NOTE = {Combined republication of the monographs
\textit{Ternary orthogonal group in
a general field} (1903) and \textit{Groups
defined for a general field by the rotation
groups} (1903). JFM:35.0181.04.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The subgroups of order a power of \( {}2 \) of the simple quinary orthogonal group in the Galois field of order \( p^n=8l\pm 3 \) ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
5 : 1
(January 1904 ),
pp. 1–38 .
Errata were published in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 5 :4 (1904) .
MR
1500658
JFM
35.0167.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1500658m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {The subgroups of order a power of \${}2\$
of the simple quinary orthogonal group
in the {G}alois field of order \$p^n=8l\pm
3\$},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {5},
NUMBER = {1},
MONTH = {January},
YEAR = {1904},
PAGES = {1--38},
DOI = {10.2307/1986199},
NOTE = {Errata were published in \textit{Trans.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{5}:4 (1904).
MR:1500658. JFM:35.0167.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the minimum degree of resolvents for the \( p \) -section of the periods of hyperelliptic functions of four periods ,”
Deutsche Math.-Ver.
13
(1904 ),
pp. 559–560 .
Available open access
here .
JFM
35.0166.02
article
BibTeX
@article {key35.0166.02j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On the minimum degree of resolvents
for the \$p\$-section of the periods of
hyperelliptic functions of four periods},
JOURNAL = {Deutsche Math.-Ver.},
FJOURNAL = {Jahresbericht der Deutschen Mathematiker-Vereinigung},
VOLUME = {13},
YEAR = {1904},
PAGES = {559--560},
NOTE = {Available open access at http://resolver.sub.uni-goettingen.de/purl?PPN37721857X_0013/dmdlog126.
JFM:35.0166.02.},
ISSN = {0012-0456},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Funktionentheoretische Vorlesungen ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
10 : 6
(1904 ),
pp. 317–321 .
Book by H. Burkhardt (Veit and Co., 1903).
MR
1558115
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1558115m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {F}unktionentheoretische
{V}orlesungen},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {10},
NUMBER = {6},
YEAR = {1904},
PAGES = {317--321},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1904-01118-0},
NOTE = {Book by H.~Burkhardt (Veit and Co.,
1903). MR:1558115.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Addition to the paper on the four known simple linear groups of order \( {}25920 \) ,”
Proc. London Math. Soc.
1 : 1
(1904 ),
pp. 283–284 .
MR
1576780
JFM
35.0168.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1576780m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Addition to the paper on the four known
simple linear groups of order \${}25920\$},
JOURNAL = {Proc. London Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Proceedings of the London Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {1},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1904},
PAGES = {283--284},
DOI = {10.1112/plms/s2-1.1.283},
NOTE = {MR:1576780. JFM:35.0168.01.},
ISSN = {0024-6115},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Application of groups to a complex problem in arrangements ,”
Ann. Math. (2)
6 : 1
(October 1904 ),
pp. 31–44 .
MR
1503507
JFM
35.0168.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
@article {key1503507m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Application of groups to a complex problem
in arrangements},
JOURNAL = {Ann. Math. (2)},
FJOURNAL = {Annals of Mathematics. Second Series},
VOLUME = {6},
NUMBER = {1},
MONTH = {October},
YEAR = {1904},
PAGES = {31--44},
DOI = {10.2307/2007156},
NOTE = {MR:1503507. JFM:35.0168.02.},
ISSN = {0003-486X},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A new extension of Dirichlet’s theorem on prime numbers ,”
Messenger of Mathematics
38
(1904 ),
pp. 155–161 .
Available open access
here .
JFM
35.0204.03
article
BibTeX
@article {key35.0204.03j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A new extension of {D}irichlet's theorem
on prime numbers},
JOURNAL = {Messenger of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {38},
YEAR = {1904},
PAGES = {155--161},
NOTE = {Available open access at http://oeis.org/w/images/2/22/A_new_extension_of_Dirichlet%27s_theorem_on_prime_numbers.pdf.
JFM:35.0204.03.},
ISSN = {0314-0860},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Errata: ‘On the subgroups of order a power of \( p \) in the quaternary abelian group in the Galois field of order \( p^n \) ’ ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
5 : 4
(1904 ),
pp. 550–551 .
Errata for article in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 4 :4 (1903) .
MR
1500465
article
BibTeX
@article {key1500465m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Errata: ``{O}n the subgroups of order
a power of \$p\$ in the quaternary abelian
group in the {G}alois field of order
\$p^n\$''},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {5},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1904},
PAGES = {550--551},
DOI = {10.2307/1986281},
NOTE = {Errata for article in \textit{Trans.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{4}:4 (1903).
MR:1500465.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Errata: ‘Definitions of a field by independent postulates’ ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
5 : 4
(1904 ),
pp. 549–550 .
Errata for article in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 4 :1 (1903) .
MR
1500461
article
BibTeX
@article {key1500461m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Errata: ``{D}efinitions of a field by
independent postulates''},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {5},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1904},
PAGES = {549--550},
DOI = {10.2307/1986281},
NOTE = {Errata for article in \textit{Trans.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{4}:1 (1903).
MR:1500461.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Errata: ‘The subgroups of order a power of \( {}2 \) of the simple quinary orthogonal group in the Galois field of order \( p^n=8l\pm3 \) ’ ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
5 : 4
(1904 ),
pp. 551 .
Errata for paper published in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 5 :1 (1904) .
MR
1500468
article
BibTeX
@article {key1500468m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Errata: ``{T}he subgroups of order a
power of \${}2\$ of the simple quinary
orthogonal group in the {G}alois field
of order \$p^n=8l\pm3\$''},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {5},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1904},
PAGES = {551},
DOI = {10.2307/1986281},
NOTE = {Errata for paper published in \textit{Trans.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{5}:1 (1904).
MR:1500468.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Errata: ‘Determination of all the subgroups of the known simple group of order \( {}25920 \) ’ ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
5 : 4
(1904 ),
pp. 551 .
Errata for article published in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 5 :2 (1904) .
MR
1500469
article
BibTeX
@article {key1500469m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Errata: ``{D}etermination of all the
subgroups of the known simple group
of order \${}25920\$''},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {5},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1904},
PAGES = {551},
DOI = {10.2307/1986281},
NOTE = {Errata for article published in \textit{Trans.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{5}:2 (1904).
MR:1500469.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Determination of all groups of binary linear substitutions with integral coefficients taken modulo \( {}3 \) and of determinant unity ,”
Ann. Math. (2)
5 : 3
(1904 ),
pp. 140–144 .
MR
1503536
JFM
35.0169.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
@article {key1503536m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Determination of all groups of binary
linear substitutions with integral coefficients
taken modulo \${}3\$ and of determinant
unity},
JOURNAL = {Ann. Math. (2)},
FJOURNAL = {Annals of Mathematics. Second Series},
VOLUME = {5},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1904},
PAGES = {140--144},
DOI = {10.2307/2007231},
NOTE = {MR:1503536. JFM:35.0169.01.},
ISSN = {0003-486X},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Vorlesungen über Algebra ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
10 : 5
(1904 ),
pp. 257–260 .
Book by G. Bauer (Teubner, 1903).
MR
1558104
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1558104m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {V}orlesungen \"uber {A}lgebra},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {10},
NUMBER = {5},
YEAR = {1904},
PAGES = {257--260},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1904-01104-0},
NOTE = {Book by G.~Bauer (Teubner, 1903). MR:1558104.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Memoir on Abelian transformations ,”
Amer. J. Math.
26 : 3
(July 1904 ),
pp. 243–318 .
MR
1507875
JFM
35.0166.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1507875m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Memoir on {A}belian transformations},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {26},
NUMBER = {3},
MONTH = {July},
YEAR = {1904},
PAGES = {243--318},
DOI = {10.2307/2369926},
NOTE = {MR:1507875. JFM:35.0166.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A property of the group \( G_2^{2n} \) all of whose operators except identity are of period \( {}2 \) ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
11 : 11
(November 1904 ),
pp. 203–206 .
MR
1516217
JFM
35.0181.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
\( G \) is a commutative group since \( ab = (ab)^{-1} = b^{-1}a^{-1} = ba \) . As a concrete form of \( G \) we may take the group of the linear substitutions which multiply each of the \( {}2n \) variables by \( \pm 1 \) .
It is always possible to separate the operators other than \( I \) of \( G_2^{2n} \) into \( {}2^n+1 \) sets each of \( {}2^n - 1 \) operators such that those of any set together with \( I \) form a group of order \( {}2^n \) , and such that no two sets have a common operator. We consider the number \( N_n \) and character of all such separations into sets. Evidently \( N_1 = 3 \) . We show that \( N_2 = 56 \) , \( N_3 = 2^{12}\cdot 3\cdot 5\cdot 31 \) .
@article {key1516217m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A property of the group \$G_2^{2n}\$ all
of whose operators except identity are
of period \${}2\$},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {11},
NUMBER = {11},
MONTH = {November},
YEAR = {1904},
PAGES = {203--206},
DOI = {10.2307/2969885},
NOTE = {MR:1516217. JFM:35.0181.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the subgroups of order a power of \( p \) in the linear homogeneous and fractional groups in the \( \mathit{GF}[p^n] \) ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
10 : 8
(1904 ),
pp. 385–397 .
MR
1558132
JFM
35.0170.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
This paper relates primarily to the subgroups \( G \) of order the highest power of \( p \) in the \( m \) -ary general and special linear homogeneous groups and the linear fractional group in the \( \mathit{GF}[p^n] \) . For the latter groups the question of the minimum index of subgroups is of importance in various applications of group theory. A knowledge of the properties of \( G \) contributes materially towards an answer to this question, as will be shown in a subsequent note.
@article {key1558132m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On the subgroups of order a power of
\$p\$ in the linear homogeneous and fractional
groups in the \$\mathit{GF}[p^n]\$},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {10},
NUMBER = {8},
YEAR = {1904},
PAGES = {385--397},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1904-01133-7},
NOTE = {MR:1558132. JFM:35.0170.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The minimum degree \( \tau \) of resolvents for the \( p \) -section of the periods of hyperelliptic functions of four periods ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
6 : 1
(January 1905 ),
pp. 48–57 .
MR
1500693
JFM
36.0508.06
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The chief object of the investigation is to prove that, if \( p > 3 \) ,
\[ \tau = (p^4 - 1)/(p - 1). \]
The case \( p=3 \) alone is exceptional, the problem then being equivalent to that of the \( {}27 \) lines on a general cubic surface. On the final page of his Traité , Jordan states that he had established the theorem for \( p=5 \) , by methods analogous to those used in his complicated discussion for \( p=3 \) , and says “mais içi la complication est beaucoup plus grande.”
It is rather remarkable that the minimum \( \tau \) should be so large as
\[ p^3 + p^2 + p + 1 ,\]
since the fractional form of the general quaternary linear group modulo \( p \) can be represented as a substitution group of this degree (and of no lower in view of the present theorem).
The paper makes considerable headway in the problem of all the subgroups of the quaternary abelian group modulo \( p \) , which plays the same rôle in the hyperelliptic modular theory (as yet but little developed) as the binary congruence group plays in the classic elliptic modular theory.
@article {key1500693m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {The minimum degree \$\tau\$ of resolvents
for the \$p\$-section of the periods of
hyperelliptic functions of four periods},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {6},
NUMBER = {1},
MONTH = {January},
YEAR = {1905},
PAGES = {48--57},
DOI = {10.2307/1986374},
NOTE = {MR:1500693. JFM:36.0508.06.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Determination of the ternary modular groups ,”
Amer. J. Math.
27 : 2
(April 1905 ),
pp. 189–202 .
MR
1505964
JFM
36.0208.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The determination of all groups of linear homogeneous transformations on \( m \) variables with coefficients in the \( \mathit{GF}[p^n] \) falls naturally into two cases:
order a multiple of \( p \) ;
order prime to \( p \) .
In the second case, the canonical form of any transformation merely multiplies each variable by a constant, and the problem is analogous to that of the determination of the finite groups of collineations in \( m \) variables. This separation of cases was followed in the treatment of binary groups.
In his elaborate memoir on ternary groups, Burnside [1895] makes the limitation that \( p^2 + p + 1 \) shall be the product of at most two prime factors \( {} > 3 \) or else the triple of such a product. His discussion is occasionally incorrect. In particular, he misses [1895, p. 81] the groups with an invariant ternary quadratic form.
The present paper on the ternary groups of order multiple of \( p \) employs methods entirely different from those used by Burnside. There is no limitation on the odd prime \( p \) . Moreover, a representative of each set of conjugate subgroups is exhibited in explicit form.
@article {key1505964m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Determination of the ternary modular
groups},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {27},
NUMBER = {2},
MONTH = {April},
YEAR = {1905},
PAGES = {189--202},
DOI = {10.2307/2369979},
NOTE = {MR:1505964. JFM:36.0208.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On hypercomplex number systems ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
6 : 3
(1905 ),
pp. 344–348 .
MR
1500716
JFM
36.0139.02
article
BibTeX
@article {key1500716m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On hypercomplex number systems},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {6},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1905},
PAGES = {344--348},
DOI = {10.2307/1986225},
NOTE = {MR:1500716. JFM:36.0139.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On finite algebras ,”
Nachr. Ges. Wiss. Göttingen
(1905 ),
pp. 358–393 .
JFM
36.0138.03
article
BibTeX
@article {key36.0138.03j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On finite algebras},
JOURNAL = {Nachr. Ges. Wiss. G\"ottingen},
FJOURNAL = {Nachrichten der Akademie der Wissenschaften
in G\"ottingen},
YEAR = {1905},
PAGES = {358--393},
NOTE = {JFM:36.0138.03.},
ISSN = {0065-5295},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the class of the substitutions of various linear groups ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
11 : 8
(1905 ),
pp. 426–432 .
MR
1558235
JFM
36.0210.02
Zbl
0960.14005
article
BibTeX
@article {key1558235m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On the class of the substitutions of
various linear groups},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {11},
NUMBER = {8},
YEAR = {1905},
PAGES = {426--432},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1905-01231-3},
NOTE = {MR:1558235. Zbl:0960.14005. JFM:36.0210.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Graphical methods in trigonometry ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
12 : 6–7
(June–July 1905 ),
pp. 129–133 .
MR
1516377
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Aside from the important work on the solution of triangles by diagrams drawn to scale, graphic methods are not usually employed in trigonometry. Even if the cartesian graphs of the trigonometric functions are constructed, no serious applications are made of these graphs. They are, however, admirably adapted to the explanation of interpolation, to the visualization and retention in the memory of the ratios for the angles \( {}0^{\circ} \) , \( {}90^{\circ} \) , etc. (in contrast to their derivation as limiting values), and to the natural solution of trigonometri equations, — in particular, to the visualization of the number of angles \( {} < 180^{\circ} \) having a given sine or cosine. In addition to these minor advantages resulting from a frequent appeal to the graphs, the graphic method may be employed to perform the highly important service of leading the student naturally to the majority of the fundamental trigonometric formulae, including the addition theorem and formulae for conversion of sum into product. This is in marked constrast to the current method by which each formula makes its appearance from some unseen source, to be followed by a more or less artificial proof.
@article {key1516377m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Graphical methods in trigonometry},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {12},
NUMBER = {6--7},
MONTH = {June--July},
YEAR = {1905},
PAGES = {129--133},
DOI = {10.2307/2971207},
NOTE = {MR:1516377.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A general theorem on algebraic numbers ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
11 : 9
(1905 ),
pp. 482–486 .
MR
1558248
JFM
36.0139.03
article
BibTeX
@article {key1558248m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A general theorem on algebraic numbers},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {11},
NUMBER = {9},
YEAR = {1905},
PAGES = {482--486},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1905-01249-0},
NOTE = {MR:1558248. JFM:36.0139.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Errata: ‘Definitions of a group and a field by independent postulates’ ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
6 : 4
(October 1905 ),
pp. 547 .
Errata for an article in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 6 :2 (1905) .
MR
1500477
article
BibTeX
@article {key1500477m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Errata: ``{D}efinitions of a group and
a field by independent postulates''},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {6},
NUMBER = {4},
MONTH = {October},
YEAR = {1905},
PAGES = {547},
URL = {http://www.jstor.org/stable/1986482},
NOTE = {Errata for an article in \textit{Trans.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{6}:2 (1905).
MR:1500477.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the real elements of certain classes of geometrical configurations ,”
Ann. Math. (2)
6 : 4
(1905 ),
pp. 141–150 .
MR
1503554
JFM
36.0209.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1503554m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On the real elements of certain classes
of geometrical configurations},
JOURNAL = {Ann. Math. (2)},
FJOURNAL = {Annals of Mathematics. Second Series},
VOLUME = {6},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1905},
PAGES = {141--150},
DOI = {10.2307/2007244},
NOTE = {MR:1503554. JFM:36.0209.01.},
ISSN = {0003-486X},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Expressions for the elements of a determinant in terms of the minors of a given order. Generalization of a theorem due to Studnicka ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
12 : 12
(December 1905 ),
pp. 217–221 .
MR
1516491
article
BibTeX
@article {key1516491m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Expressions for the elements of a determinant
in terms of the minors of a given order.
{G}eneralization of a theorem due to
{S}tudnicka},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {12},
NUMBER = {12},
MONTH = {December},
YEAR = {1905},
PAGES = {217--221},
DOI = {10.2307/2967715},
NOTE = {MR:1516491.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The group of a tactical configuration ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
11 : 4
(1905 ),
pp. 177–179 .
MR
1558199
JFM
36.0210.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1558199m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The group of a tactical configuration},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {11},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1905},
PAGES = {177--179},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1905-01193-9},
NOTE = {MR:1558199. JFM:36.0210.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Determination of all the subgroups of the three highest powers of \( p \) in the group \( G \) of all \( m \) -ary linear homogeneous transformations modulo \( p \) ,”
Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.
36
(1905 ),
pp. 373–384 .
JFM
36.0208.03
article
BibTeX
@article {key36.0208.03j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Determination of all the subgroups of
the three highest powers of \$p\$ in the
group \$G\$ of all \$m\$-ary linear homogeneous
transformations modulo \$p\$},
JOURNAL = {Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Quarterly Journal of Pure and Applied
Mathematics},
VOLUME = {36},
YEAR = {1905},
PAGES = {373--384},
NOTE = {JFM:36.0208.03.},
ISSN = {1549-6724},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Introduction à la théorie des fonctions d’une variable ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
11 : 10
(1905 ),
pp. 557–559 .
Book by J. Tannery (Hermann, 1904).
MR
1558260
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1558260m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {I}ntroduction \`a la th\'eorie
des fonctions d'une variable},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {11},
NUMBER = {10},
YEAR = {1905},
PAGES = {557--559},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1905-01264-7},
NOTE = {Book by J.~Tannery (Hermann, 1904).
MR:1558260.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A new system of simple groups ,”
Math. Ann.
60 : 1
(1905 ),
pp. 137–150 .
JFM
36.0206.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
One of the five isolated simple continuous groups not occurring in Lie’s four systems is the group of \( {}14 \) parameters studied by Killing, Cartan, and Engel. This group is a special case of a linear group on \( {}7 \) variables with coefficients in an arbitrary field or domain of rationality. The structure of the latter has been determined [1901] by the writer for fields not having modulus \( {}2 \) . The problem for modulus \( {}2 \) , which requires different analysis, is solved in the present paper. For \( q > 1 \) , we obtain a simple group of order
\[ 2^{6q}(2^{6q}-1)(2^{2q}-1) .\]
For \( q=1 \) , the group has a simple subgroup of index \( {}2 \) and order \( {}6048 \) . The latter is shown to be holoedrically isomorphic with the simple group [1899] of all ternary hyperorthogonal substitutions of determinant unity in the Galois field of order \( {}3^2 \) . The generational relations of the isomorphic abstract group are determined and a transitive representation on \( {}36 \) letters exhibited.
For \( q=1 \) , the group of order \( {}12096 \) is shown to be simply isomorphic with a subgroup of index \( {}120 \) of the senary Abelian group modulus \( {}2 \) , of order \( {}2^9\cdot 3^4\cdot 5 \cdot 7 \) . The latter is known [Jordan 1870, pp. 229–242; Dickson 1902, pp. 377–382] to be simply isomorphic with the group of the equation for the \( {}28 \) bitangents to a quartic curve without double points. It therefore has resolvents of degrees \( {}63 = 2^6-1 \) and \( {}120 \) , the latter not hitherto noticed.
@article {key36.0206.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A new system of simple groups},
JOURNAL = {Math. Ann.},
FJOURNAL = {Mathematische Annalen},
VOLUME = {60},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1905},
PAGES = {137--150},
DOI = {10.1007/BF01447497},
NOTE = {JFM:36.0206.01.},
ISSN = {0025-5831},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Subgroups of order a power of \( p \) in the general and special \( m \) -ary linear homogeneous groups in the \( \mathit{GF}[p^n] \) ,”
Amer. J. Math.
27 : 3
(July 1905 ),
pp. 280–302 .
MR
1507878
JFM
36.0208.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
It would seem that the most effective method of determining all the subgroups of order a multiple of \( p \) of a linear group in the Galois field of order \( p^n \) is that based upon a complete knowledge of the subgroups of order a power of \( p \) . This method has proved successful for the ternary groups [1905] and, as I will show on another occasion, also for the quaternary groups.
The present investigation proceeds far enough to give a clear insight into the nature of the simple laws pervading the subject. It is hoped that the results are capable of extension by induction to all powers of \( p \) . To indicate the difficulty of this step, it may be remarked that its completion would give the means of deriving at once an explicit list of all groups of order a power of a prime, and simultaneously all the subgroups of each.
A second aim of the paper was to furnish data for the problem of the determination of all \( m \) -ary groups for low values of \( m \) .
@article {key1507878m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Subgroups of order a power of \$p\$ in
the general and special \$m\$-ary linear
homogeneous groups in the \$\mathit{GF}[p^n]\$},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {27},
NUMBER = {3},
MONTH = {July},
YEAR = {1905},
PAGES = {280--302},
DOI = {10.2307/2370149},
NOTE = {MR:1507878. JFM:36.0208.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On semi-groups and the general isomorphism between infinite groups ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
6 : 2
(1905 ),
pp. 205–208 .
MR
1500707
JFM
36.0207.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
When there exists a correspondence between the elements of two finite groups such that the product of two elements of one corresponds to the product of the corresponding elements of the other, then the elements of either which correspond to the identity of the other group form themselves a group. It is somewhat surprising that this familiar theorem fails in general for infinite groups, as shown by definite examples in §§7–8. Nevertheless, De Séguier [1904] has attempted to establish the theorem for any groups; the error in his argument is quite subtle. The correct theorem involves the concept semi-group , which reduces to a group when there is a finite number of elements, but not in general for an infinitude of elements.
@article {key1500707m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {On semi-groups and the general isomorphism
between infinite groups},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {6},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1905},
PAGES = {205--208},
DOI = {10.2307/1986299},
NOTE = {MR:1500707. JFM:36.0207.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Definitions of a group and a field by independent postulates ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
6 : 2
(1905 ),
pp. 198–204 .
Errata published in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. textbf{6}:4 (1905) .
MR
1500706
JFM
36.0207.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1500706m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Definitions of a group and a field by
independent postulates},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {6},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1905},
PAGES = {198--204},
DOI = {10.2307/1986298},
NOTE = {Errata published in \textit{Trans. Am.
Math. Soc.} textbf{6}:4 (1905). MR:1500706.
JFM:36.0207.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the cyclotomic function ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
12 : 4
(April 1905 ),
pp. 86–89 .
MR
1516323
article
BibTeX
@article {key1516323m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On the cyclotomic function},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {12},
NUMBER = {4},
MONTH = {April},
YEAR = {1905},
PAGES = {86--89},
DOI = {10.2307/2970367},
NOTE = {MR:1516323.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Linear algebras in which division is always uniquely possible ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
7 : 3
(1906 ),
pp. 370–390 .
MR
1500755
JFM
37.0111.06
article
BibTeX
@article {key1500755m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Linear algebras in which division is
always uniquely possible},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {7},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1906},
PAGES = {370--390},
DOI = {10.2307/1986324},
NOTE = {MR:1500755. JFM:37.0111.06.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On commutative linear algebras in which division is always uniquely possible ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
7 : 4
(1906 ),
pp. 514–522 .
MR
1500764
JFM
37.0112.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
We consider commutative linear algebras in \( {}2n \) units, with coördinates in a general field \( F \) , such that \( n \) of the units define a sub-algebra forming a field \( F(J) \) . The elements of the algebra may be exhibited compactly in the form \( A + BI \) , where \( A \) and \( B \) range over \( F(J) \) . As multiplication is not associative in general, \( A \) and \( B \) do not play the rôle of coördinates, so that the algebra is not binary in the usual significance of the term. Nevertheless, by the use of this binary notation, we may exhibit in a very luminous form the multiplication-tables of certain algebras in four and six units, given in an earlier paper [1906]. Proof of the existence of the algebras and of the uniqueness of division now presents no difficulty. The form of the corresponding algebra in \( {}2n \) units becomes obvious. After thus perfecting and extending known results, we attack the problem of the determination of all algebras with the prescribed properties. An extensive new class of algebras is obtained.
@article {key1500764m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On commutative linear algebras in which
division is always uniquely possible},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {7},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1906},
PAGES = {514--522},
DOI = {10.2307/1986243},
NOTE = {MR:1500764. JFM:37.0112.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On linear algebras ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
13 : 11
(November 1906 ),
pp. 201–205 .
MR
1516696
JFM
37.0115.03
article
BibTeX
@article {key1516696m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On linear algebras},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {13},
NUMBER = {11},
MONTH = {November},
YEAR = {1906},
PAGES = {201--205},
DOI = {10.2307/2970649},
NOTE = {MR:1516696. JFM:37.0115.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the quaternary linear homogeneous groups modulo \( p \) of order a multiple of \( p \) ,”
Amer. J. Math.
28 : 1
(1906 ),
pp. 1–16 .
MR
1505980
JFM
37.0173.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1505980m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {On the quaternary linear homogeneous
groups modulo \$p\$ of order a multiple
of \$p\$},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {28},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1906},
PAGES = {1--16},
DOI = {10.2307/2370053},
NOTE = {MR:1505980. JFM:37.0173.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The abstract form of the special linear homogeneous group in an arbitrary field ,”
Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.
38
(1906 ),
pp. 141–145 .
JFM
38.0181.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key38.0181.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The abstract form of the special linear
homogeneous group in an arbitrary field},
JOURNAL = {Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Quarterly Journal of Pure and Applied
Mathematics},
VOLUME = {38},
YEAR = {1906},
PAGES = {141--145},
NOTE = {JFM:38.0181.01.},
ISSN = {1549-6724},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The abstract form of the Abelian linear groups ,”
Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.
38
(1906 ),
pp. 145–158 .
JFM
38.0181.02
article
BibTeX
@article {key38.0181.02j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The abstract form of the {A}belian linear
groups},
JOURNAL = {Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Quarterly Journal of Pure and Applied
Mathematics},
VOLUME = {38},
YEAR = {1906},
PAGES = {145--158},
NOTE = {JFM:38.0181.02.},
ISSN = {1549-6724},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the theory of equations in a modular field ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
13 : 1
(1906 ),
pp. 8–10 .
MR
1558391
JFM
37.0173.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The object of this note is to point out that the Galois theory of algebraic equations may be extended to equations in a field \( F \) having a modulus \( p \) . For a finite field the theory is so obvious that this case furnishes a simple, but characteristic, example of the Galois theory.
@article {key1558391m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On the theory of equations in a modular
field},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {13},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1906},
PAGES = {8--10},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1906-01406-9},
NOTE = {MR:1558391. JFM:37.0173.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Criteria for the irreducibility of functions in a finite field ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
13 : 1
(1906 ),
pp. 1–8 .
MR
1558390
JFM
37.0094.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1558390m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Criteria for the irreducibility of functions
in a finite field},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {13},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1906},
PAGES = {1--8},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1906-01403-3},
NOTE = {MR:1558390. JFM:37.0094.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On quadratic, Hermitian and bilinear forms ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
7 : 2
(1906 ),
pp. 275–292 .
MR
1500749
JFM
37.0137.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1500749m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {On quadratic, {H}ermitian and bilinear
forms},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {7},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1906},
PAGES = {275--292},
DOI = {10.2307/1986440},
NOTE = {MR:1500749. JFM:37.0137.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Modular theory of group characters ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
13 : 10
(1907 ),
pp. 477–488 .
MR
1558503
JFM
38.0180.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The problem of the representation of a given finite group as a linear homogeneous group with real or complex coefficients has been fully treated by Frobenius by means of his theory of group characters. The present paper and the companion paper to appear simultaneously in the Transactions give a first attack on the corresponding problem for linear congruence groups, and in general for finite linear groups in any field \( F \) having a prime modulus \( p \) . To obtain simple results, it is in general necessary to introduce certain irrationalities, viz., roots of equations with coefficients in \( F \) . As our reference field we shall take the field \( F \) composed of the totality of integral rational functions with integral coefficients of all Galois imaginaries of all degrees, i.e. , the roots of congruences irreducible modulo \( p \) . In other words, \( F_p \) is the aggregate of the Galois fields \( \mathit{GF}[p^n] \) , \( n = 1 \) , \( {}2 \) , \( {}3, \dots \) . Hence every equation with coefficients in \( F_p \) is completely solvable in \( F_p \) .
@article {key1558503m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Modular theory of group characters},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {13},
NUMBER = {10},
YEAR = {1907},
PAGES = {477--488},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1907-01503-3},
NOTE = {MR:1558503. JFM:38.0180.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On quadratic forms in a general field ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
14 : 3
(1907 ),
pp. 108–115 .
MR
1558550
JFM
38.0182.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
We investigate the equivalence, under linear transformation in a general field \( F \) , of two quadratic forms
\begin{align*} q &\equiv \sum_{i=1}^n a_ix_i^2 &&(a_i\neq 0),\\ Q &\equiv \sum_{i=1}^n\alpha_i X_i^2 &&(\alpha_i\neq 0). \end{align*}
@article {key1558550m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On quadratic forms in a general field},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {14},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1907},
PAGES = {108--115},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1907-01568-9},
NOTE = {MR:1558550. JFM:38.0182.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Invariants of binary forms under modular transformations ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
8 : 2
(1907 ),
pp. 205–232 .
Errata published in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 8 :4 (1907) .
MR
1500782
JFM
38.0147.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
For a non-modular field \( F \) and a binary form \( f \) with coefficients in \( F \) , the problem of the determination of functions of the coefficients and variables of \( f \) , invariant under all binary linear transformations in \( F \) , is formally identical with the corresponding problem of the ordinary algebraic invariant theory. But for a finite modular field the problem is essentially different; the terms of an invariant need not be of the same degree nor of constant weight; the annihilators are quite complicated, involving higher partial derivatives. Fortunately, the difficulty in the direct computation of the invariants is in marked contrast with the regularity observed in the actual form of the invariants and with the simplicity of the relations between the invariants, common to the algebraic and modular theories, and the additional invariants peculiar to the modular theory.
In the study of the invariants of a given quantic in the Galois field of order \( p^n \) , we have a doubly infinite system of problems, corresponding to a single problem in the algebraic theory. Interest naturally centers in a comparative study, rather than in the individual problems. The aim of the present paper is to give in correlation the results of a rather extensive comparative study. Formal proofs of the laws observed are given only in a few instances. It is hoped that proofs of the remaining properties observed will become more practicable when a satisfactory symbolic treatment is constructed.
@article {key1500782m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Invariants of binary forms under modular
transformations},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {8},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1907},
PAGES = {205--232},
DOI = {10.2307/1986346},
NOTE = {Errata published in \textit{Trans. Am.
Math. Soc.} \textbf{8}:4 (1907). MR:1500782.
JFM:38.0147.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Modular theory of group-matrices ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
8 : 3
(1907 ),
pp. 389–398 .
MR
1500793
JFM
38.0180.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
It is here proved that, if \( p^{\pi} \) is the highest power of the prime \( p \) dividing the order a of a group \( G \) , the group-matrix of \( G \) can be transformed, by a matrix whose elements are integers taken modulo \( p \) , into a compound matrix in which the submatrices to the right of the main diagonal have zero elements throughout, while the \( p^{\pi} \) submatrices in the diagonal are identical. Let \( D \) denote one of the diagonal submatrices, so that \( D \) is a square matrix of order \( g/p^{\pi} \) . Then the group-determinant \( \Delta \) of \( G \) is congruent to \( |D|^{p^{\pi}} \) modulo \( p \) . This result is in marked contrast to the non-modular theory, in which each algebraically irreducible factor of \( \Delta \) enters to a power exactly equal to its degree.
It is shown in §8 that the group-matrices of all groups of order \( p^{\pi} \) can be reduced to their canonical form modulo \( p \) by one and the same transformation.
An interesting theorem on group-characters is obtained in §11.
@article {key1500793m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Modular theory of group-matrices},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {8},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1907},
PAGES = {389--398},
DOI = {10.2307/1988782},
NOTE = {MR:1500793. JFM:38.0180.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Invariants of the general quadratic form modulo \( {}2 \) ,”
Proc. London Math. Soc. (2)
5 : 1
(1907 ),
pp. 301–324 .
MR
1577339
JFM
38.0150.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The theory of invariants of homogeneous forms under linear transformation with coefficients in a finite field of order \( p^n \) offers decided contrasts [1907] to the usual algebraic theory.
In the present paper I consider the invariants of the \( m \) -ary quadratic form [1907, 1908, 1899] \( Q_m \) in the field of order \( {}2 \) , the most important case for the applications. For each value of \( m \) less than \( {}6 \) , I obtain a complete set (\( m \) in number) of independent invariants, as well as a complete set of linearly independent invariants. A number of the invariants for \( m = 6 \) are given in §§18, 19.
The minimum number of variables upon which a form \( Q_m \) can be expressed equals the rank \( r \) of the discriminantal determinant, \( r \) being defined as in the algebraic theory, except that for minors of odd order the factor \( {}2 \) must first be deleted. When \( r \) is even there are two distinct canonical forms. It is shown in the present paper that the complete classification of quadratic forms can be accomplished by means of invariant functions .
@article {key1577339m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Invariants of the general quadratic
form modulo \${}2\$},
JOURNAL = {Proc. London Math. Soc. (2)},
FJOURNAL = {Proceedings of the London Mathematical
Society. Second Series},
VOLUME = {5},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1907},
PAGES = {301--324},
DOI = {10.1112/plms/s2-5.1.301},
NOTE = {MR:1577339. JFM:38.0150.01.},
ISSN = {0024-6115},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Errata: ‘Invariants of binary forms under modular transformations’ ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
8 : 4
(1907 ),
pp. 535 .
Errata for article in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 8 :2 (1907) .
MR
1500482
article
BibTeX
@article {key1500482m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Errata: ``{I}nvariants of binary forms
under modular transformations''},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {8},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1907},
PAGES = {535},
DOI = {10.2307/1988729},
NOTE = {Errata for article in \textit{Trans.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{8}:2 (1907).
MR:1500482.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Note on the volume of a tetrahedron in terms of the coordinates of the vertices ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
14 : 6–7
(1907 ),
pp. 117–118 .
MR
1516848
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Quite a variety of propositions of solid analytic geometry are needed for the usual derivation of the volume of a tetrahedron (cf. C. Smith, p. 24). If, as in the present note, we give an elementary proof making use merely of the concept of coordinates, we are in a position to apply the result to derive easily several of the initial propositions in solid analytics, e.g. that the equation of any plane is of the first degree, and conversely.
@article {key1516848m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Note on the volume of a tetrahedron
in terms of the coordinates of the vertices},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {14},
NUMBER = {6--7},
YEAR = {1907},
PAGES = {117--118},
DOI = {10.2307/2971686},
NOTE = {MR:1516848.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book reviews: Zahlentheorie and Einleitung in die allgemeine Theorie der Algebraischen Grössen ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
13 : 7
(1907 ),
pp. 348–362 .
Books by P. Bachmann (Teubner, 1905) and J. König (Teubner, 1903).
MR
1558477
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1558477m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book reviews: {Z}ahlentheorie and {E}inleitung
in die allgemeine {T}heorie der {A}lgebraischen
{G}r\"ossen},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {13},
NUMBER = {7},
YEAR = {1907},
PAGES = {348--362},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1907-01480-5},
NOTE = {Books by P. Bachmann (Teubner, 1905)
and J. K\"onig (Teubner, 1903). MR:1558477.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The symmetric group on eight letters and the senary first hypoabelian group ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
13 : 8
(1907 ),
pp. 386–389 .
MR
1558486
JFM
38.0182.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The set of all transformations
\begin{align*} \xi_i^{\prime} &= \sum_{j=1}^3(\alpha_{ij}\xi_j + \gamma_{ij}\eta_j), \\ \eta^{\prime}_i &= \sum_{j=1}^3(\beta_{ij}\xi_j + \delta_{ij}\eta_j) \quad(i=1,2,3) \end{align*}
with integral coefficients taken modulo \( {}2 \) which leave invariant the quadratic form
\[ \xi_1\eta_1 + \xi_2\eta_2 + \xi_3\eta_3 \]
form a group \( G_0 \) , called the (total) senary first hypoabelian group. It is a subgroup of the senary abelian linear group. The order of \( G_0 \) is (Linear Groups , page 206)
\[ 2(2^3 - 1)(2^4 - 1)2^4(2^2 - 1)2^2 = 8!. \]
The object of this note is to prove that \( G_0 \) is simply isomorphic with the symmetric group on eight letters.
@article {key1558486m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The symmetric group on eight letters
and the senary first hypoabelian group},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {13},
NUMBER = {8},
YEAR = {1907},
PAGES = {386--389},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1907-01485-4},
NOTE = {MR:1558486. JFM:38.0182.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the last theorem of Fermat ,”
Messenger of Mathematics
38
(1908 ),
pp. 14–32 .
Part II published in Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math. 40 (1908) .
JFM
39.0260.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key39.0260.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On the last theorem of {F}ermat},
JOURNAL = {Messenger of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {38},
YEAR = {1908},
PAGES = {14--32},
NOTE = {Part II published in \textit{Quart.
J. Pure Appl. Math.} \textbf{40} (1908).
JFM:39.0260.01.},
ISSN = {0314-0860},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On families of quadratic forms in a general field ,”
Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.
39
(1908 ),
pp. 316–333 .
JFM
39.0148.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key39.0148.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On families of quadratic forms in a
general field},
JOURNAL = {Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Quarterly Journal of Pure and Applied
Mathematics},
VOLUME = {39},
YEAR = {1908},
PAGES = {316--333},
NOTE = {JFM:39.0148.01.},
ISSN = {1549-6724},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The Galois group of a reciprocal quartic equation ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
15 : 4
(April 1908 ),
pp. 71–78 .
MR
1517010
JFM
39.0130.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1517010m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The {G}alois group of a reciprocal quartic
equation},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {15},
NUMBER = {4},
MONTH = {April},
YEAR = {1908},
PAGES = {71--78},
DOI = {10.2307/2968378},
NOTE = {MR:1517010. JFM:39.0130.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the congruence \( x^n+y^n+z^n=0 \) (mod \( p \) ) ,”
J. Reine Angew. Math.
135
(1908 ),
pp. 134–141 .
JFM
39.0260.02
article
BibTeX
@article {key39.0260.02j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On the congruence \$x^n+y^n+z^n=0\$ (mod
\$p\$)},
JOURNAL = {J. Reine Angew. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Journal f\"ur die Reine und Angewandte
Mathematik},
VOLUME = {135},
YEAR = {1908},
PAGES = {134--141},
NOTE = {JFM:39.0260.02.},
ISSN = {0075-4102},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the last theorem of Fermat, II ,”
Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.
40
(1908 ),
pp. 27–45 .
Part I published in Messenger of Mathematics 38 (1908) .
JFM
39.0260.03
article
BibTeX
@article {key39.0260.03j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On the last theorem of {F}ermat, {II}},
JOURNAL = {Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Quarterly Journal of Pure and Applied
Mathematics},
VOLUME = {40},
YEAR = {1908},
PAGES = {27--45},
NOTE = {Part I published in \textit{Messenger
of Mathematics} \textbf{38} (1908).
JFM:39.0260.03.},
ISSN = {1549-6724},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the canonical forms and automorphs of ternary cubic forms ,”
Amer. J. Math.
30 : 2
(April 1908 ),
pp. 117–128 .
MR
1506034
JFM
39.0149.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Gordan [1900] has given a complete set of canonical types of ternary cubic forms and has determined the algebraic irrationalities occurring in the reducing linear transformations. There does not seem to be at hand a reduction theory in which the coefficients of the form and those of the reducing transformations belong to a given field \( F \) . The case in which \( F \) has the modulus \( {}3 \) is essentially different from the contrary case and will be treated in the present paper. After treating the reduction problem rationally in the initial field, we consider, in §§19–20, reductions involving irrationalities and obtain eleven ultimate canonical forms. The result for modular fields is in contrast to Gordan’s results for the field of all complex numbers.
@article {key1506034m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On the canonical forms and automorphs
of ternary cubic forms},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {30},
NUMBER = {2},
MONTH = {April},
YEAR = {1908},
PAGES = {117--128},
DOI = {10.2307/2370157},
NOTE = {MR:1506034. JFM:39.0149.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Invariantive reduction of quadratic forms in the \( \mathit{GF}[2^n] \) ,”
Amer. J. Math.
30 : 3
(July 1908 ),
pp. 263–281 .
MR
1506042
JFM
39.0146.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In the American Journal of Mathematics , Vol. XXI (1899), I gave a complete set of non-equivalent canonical forms of \( m \) -ary quadratic forms in the Galois field of order \( p^n \) . The cases \( p=2 \) and \( p > 2 \) are essentially different. In the opening pages of the present paper, I give a simpler treatment of the important case \( p=2 \) , a treatment bringing to the front some of the invariants of the form. In §§4,5, I show that the rank \( r \) of the discriminantal determinant gives the minimum number of variables on which the form can be expressed. The definition of \( r \) in this modular theory differs from that in the algebraic theory in the employment of the halves of the minors of odd order. In particular, for \( m \) odd, the discriminant vanishes identically in the \( \mathit{GF}[2^n] \) , while the semi-discriminant \( S_m \) is an important invariant.
The larger part of the paper is devoted to the determination and application of a complete set of linearly independent invariants of the ternary [1907] quadratic form
\[ a_1x_2x_3 + \cdots + \sum b_ix_i^2 \]
in the \( \mathit{GF}[2^n] \) for \( n\leq 4 \) . All the invariants may be expressed in terms of three fundamental independent invariants:
\begin{align*} S_3 &= a_1a_2a_3 + \sum a_i^2b_i,\\ A &= \prod_{i=1,2,3}(a_i^{2^n-1}-1),\\ F &= f + f^2 + f^4 + \cdots + f^{2^{n-1}}, \end{align*}
where \( f \) is a function increasing rapidly in complexity as \( n \) increases.
@article {key1506042m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Invariantive reduction of quadratic
forms in the \$\mathit{GF}[2^n]\$},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {30},
NUMBER = {3},
MONTH = {July},
YEAR = {1908},
PAGES = {263--281},
DOI = {10.2307/2369949},
NOTE = {MR:1506042. JFM:39.0146.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the factorization of large numbers ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
15 : 12
(December 1908 ),
pp. 217–222 .
MR
1517123
JFM
39.0272.04
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In the study of a difficult problem, it is a decided handicap to be denied the useful information that accompanies a knowledge of the origin of the proposed problem. There is little interest and much labor in the factorization of numbers taken at random. The real desideratum is a method which is capable of making effective use of the information which can be derived from the origin of the proposed number, and of auxiliary tables at command. For example, we may be concerned with numbers of a given form such as \( m^n\pm 1 \) , or with the eliminant of a system of congruences under investigation. We shall here illustrate such a method by determining the composition, hitherto unknown, of two numbers each of eleven digits.
@article {key1517123m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On the factorization of large numbers},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {15},
NUMBER = {12},
MONTH = {December},
YEAR = {1908},
PAGES = {217--222},
DOI = {10.2307/2969817},
NOTE = {MR:1517123. JFM:39.0272.04.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Representations of the general symmetric group as linear groups in finite and infinite fields ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
9 : 2
(1908 ),
pp. 121–148 .
MR
1500805
JFM
39.0198.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In a series of articles in the Berliner Berichte , beginning in 1896, Frobenius has developed an elaborate theory of group-characters and applied it to the representation of a given finite group \( G \) as a non-modular linear group. Later, Burnside [1898, 1903] approached the subject from the standpoint of continuous groups. The writer has shown [1902] that the method employed by Burnside may be replaced by one involving only purely rational processes and hence leading to results valid for a general field. The last treatment, however, expressly excludes the case in which the field has a modulus which divides the order of \( G \) . The exclusion of this case is not merely a matter of convenience, nor merely a limitation due to the particular method of treatment; indeed [1903], the properties of the group-determinant differ essentially from those holding when the modulus does not divide the order of \( G \) . Thus when \( G \) is of order \( q! \) , the general theory gives no information as to the representations in a field having a modulus \( {}\leq q \) , whereas the case of a small modulus is the most important one for the applications.
The present paper investigates the linear homogeneous groups on \( m \) variables, with coefficients in a field \( F \) , which are simply isomorphic with the symmetric group on \( q \) letters. The treatment is elementary and entirely independent of the papers cited above; in particular, the investigation is made for all moduli without exception. The principal result is the determination of the minimum value of the number of variables.
@article {key1500805m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Representations of the general symmetric
group as linear groups in finite and
infinite fields},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {9},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1908},
PAGES = {121--148},
DOI = {10.2307/1988647},
NOTE = {MR:1500805. JFM:39.0198.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Criteria for the irreducibility of a reciprocal equation ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
14 : 9
(1908 ),
pp. 426–430 .
MR
1558646
JFM
39.0121.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
A reciprocal equation \( f(x) = x^m + \cdots = 0 \) is one for which
\[ x^m f(1/x) \equiv cf(x). \]
Replacing \( x \) by \( {}1/x \) , we see that \( f \equiv c^2f \) , \( c = \pm 1 \) . Now \( f(x) \) has the factor \( x \pm 1 \) and hence is reducible, unless \( m \) is even and \( c = +1 \) . Further discussion may therefore be limited to equations
\[ F(x) \equiv x^{2n} + c_1 x^{2n-1} + c_2x^{2n-2} + \cdots + c_2x^2 + c_1x + 1 = 0 \]
of even degree and having
\[ x^{2n}F(1/x) \equiv F(x). \]
Let \( R \) be a domain of rationality containing the \( c \) ’s.
Under the substitution
\[ x + 1/x = y, \]
\( x^{-n}F(x) \) becomes a polynomial in \( y \) ,
\[ \phi(y) = y^n + k_1y^{n-1} + \cdots + k_n, \]
with coefficients in \( R \) . By a suitable choice of the \( c \) ’s, the \( k \) ’s may be made equal to any assigned values.
We shall establish in §§2–7 the following:
Necessary and sufficient conditions for the irreducibility of \( F(x) \) in the domain \( R \) are
\( \phi(y) \) must be irreducible in \( R \) .
\( F(x) \) must not equal a product of two distinct irreducible functions of degree \( n \) .
The second condition is discussed in §§8–10.
@article {key1558646m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Criteria for the irreducibility of a
reciprocal equation},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {14},
NUMBER = {9},
YEAR = {1908},
PAGES = {426--430},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1908-01649-5},
NOTE = {MR:1558646. JFM:39.0121.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On triple algebras and ternary cubic forms ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
14 : 4
(1908 ),
pp. 160–169 .
MR
1558578
JFM
39.0138.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
For any field \( F \) in which there is an irreducible cubic equation \( f(\rho) = 0 \) , the norm of \( x + y\rho + z\rho^2 \) is a ternary cubic form \( C \) which vanishes for no set of values \( x, y, z \) in \( F \) , other than \( x = y = z = 0 \) . The conditions under which the general ternary form has the last property are here determined for the case of finite fields. One formulation of the result is as follows:
The necessary and sufficient conditions that a ternary cubic form \( C \) shall vanish for no set of values \( x \) , \( y \) , \( z \) in the \( \mathit{GF}[p^n] \) , \( p > 2 \) , other than \( x = y = z = 0 \) , are that its Hessian shall equal \( mC \) where \( m \) is a constant different from zero, and that the binary form obtained from \( C \) by setting \( z = 0 \) shall be irreducible in the field.
@article {key1558578m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On triple algebras and ternary cubic
forms},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {14},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1908},
PAGES = {160--169},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1908-01567-2},
NOTE = {MR:1558578. JFM:39.0138.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On higher congruences and modular invariants ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
14 : 7
(1908 ),
pp. 313–318 .
MR
1558615
JFM
39.0256.04
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The object of this paper is to give a two-fold generalization of Hurwitz’s [1903] explicit formula for the number of integral roots of a given congruence modulo \( p \) , \( p \) being prime. On the one hand, we may derive an equally simple formula which gives, apart from a multiple of \( p \) , the number of the roots of a specified order (\( {}\leq t \) ) of irrationality; viz., the roots belonging to the Galois field of order \( p^t \) On the other hand, the problem may, without loss of simplicity, be further generalized [Kühne 1903] by replacing the initial field of integers modulo \( p \) by an arbitrary Galois field, \( \mathit{GF}[p^n] \) .
@article {key1558615m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On higher congruences and modular invariants},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {14},
NUMBER = {7},
YEAR = {1908},
PAGES = {313--318},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1908-01616-1},
NOTE = {MR:1558615. JFM:39.0256.04.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A class of groups in an arbitrary realm connected with the configuration of the \( {}27 \) lines on a cubic surface (second paper) ,”
Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.
39
(1908 ),
pp. 205–209 .
JFM
39.0198.03
article
BibTeX
@article {key39.0198.03j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A class of groups in an arbitrary realm
connected with the configuration of
the \${}27\$ lines on a cubic surface
(second paper)},
JOURNAL = {Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Quarterly Journal of Pure and Applied
Mathematics},
VOLUME = {39},
YEAR = {1908},
PAGES = {205--209},
NOTE = {JFM:39.0198.03.},
ISSN = {1549-6724},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Combinants ,”
Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.
40
(1908 ),
pp. 349–365 .
JFM
40.0164.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key40.0164.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Combinants},
JOURNAL = {Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Quarterly Journal of Pure and Applied
Mathematics},
VOLUME = {40},
YEAR = {1908},
PAGES = {349--365},
NOTE = {JFM:40.0164.01.},
ISSN = {1549-6724},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Rational edged cuboids with equal volumes and equal surfaces ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
16 : 6–7
(June–July 1909 ),
pp. 107–114 .
MR
1517231
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In the Bulletin , May 1909, p. 401, Professor Kasner proposed the problem to find two cuboids (rectangular parallelopipeds) with equal volumes and equal volumes and equal surfaces, and in which the dimensions are all integral.
The problem is to find two distinct triples of integers such that
\begin{align*} xyz &= x^{\prime}y^{\prime}z^{\prime},\\ xy+xz+yz &=x^{\prime}y^{\prime}+x^{\prime}z^{\prime}+y^{\prime}z^{\prime}. \end{align*}
I shall prove that each integer must exceed unity and that the volume \( xyz \) must be the product of five or more primes.
@article {key1517231m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Rational edged cuboids with equal volumes
and equal surfaces},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {16},
NUMBER = {6--7},
MONTH = {June--July},
YEAR = {1909},
PAGES = {107--114},
DOI = {10.2307/2969165},
NOTE = {MR:1517231.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson and M. Kaba :
“On the representation of numbers as the sum of two squares ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
16 : 5
(May 1909 ),
pp. 85–87 .
JFM
40.0267.07
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key40.0267.07j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E. and Kaba, M.},
TITLE = {On the representation of numbers as
the sum of two squares},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {16},
NUMBER = {5},
MONTH = {May},
YEAR = {1909},
PAGES = {85--87},
URL = {http://www.jstor.org/stable/2968441},
NOTE = {JFM:40.0267.07.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the representation of numbers by modular forms ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
15 : 7
(1909 ),
pp. 338–347 .
MR
1558771
JFM
40.0269.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
For any field \( F \) in which there is an irreducible equation \( f(\rho) = 0 \) of degree \( m \) , the norm of
\[ x_0 + x_1\rho + x_2\rho^2 + \cdots + x_{m-1}\rho^{m-1} \]
is a form of degree \( m \) in \( m \) variables which vanishes for no set of values \( x_i \) in the field \( F \) , other than the set in which every \( x_i = 0 \) . For a finite field it seems to be true that every form of degree \( m \) in \( m + 1 \) variables vanishes for values, not all zero, in the field. For \( m = 2 \) and \( m = 3 \) this theorem is established in §§2, 3. The corresponding theorem does not hold in general for infinite fields. But A. Meyer [Bachmann 1898, p. 266, p. 553] has shown that any indefinite quadratic form in five variables vanishes for integral values, not all zero, of the variables.
Modular forms which represent only squares have been investigated at length by the writer [1909]; those which represent cubes exclusively are considered in §§4–12.
@article {key1558771m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On the representation of numbers by
modular forms},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {15},
NUMBER = {7},
YEAR = {1909},
PAGES = {338--347},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1909-01777-X},
NOTE = {MR:1558771. JFM:40.0269.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On commutative linear groups ,”
Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.
40
(1909 ),
pp. 167–196 .
JFM
40.0186.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key40.0186.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On commutative linear groups},
JOURNAL = {Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Quarterly Journal of Pure and Applied
Mathematics},
VOLUME = {40},
YEAR = {1909},
PAGES = {167--196},
NOTE = {JFM:40.0186.01.},
ISSN = {1549-6724},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Equivalence of pairs of bilinear or quadratic forms under rational transformation ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
10 : 3
(1909 ),
pp. 347–360 .
MR
1500845
JFM
40.0163.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
We consider pairs of bilinear or quadratic forms \( A \) and \( B \) with coefficients in a given field \( F \) . We seek necessary and sufficient conditions for the equivalence of \( A \) , \( B \) with \( A^{\prime} \) , \( B^{\prime} \) under a linear transformation with coefficients in \( F \) . According as the determinant \( |\lambda A + \mu B| \) is or is not identically zero, the case is called singular or non-singular, respectively. Both cases are treated in this paper.
@article {key1500845m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Equivalence of pairs of bilinear or
quadratic forms under rational transformation},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {10},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1909},
PAGES = {347--360},
DOI = {10.2307/1988625},
NOTE = {MR:1500845. JFM:40.0163.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A theory of invariants ,”
Amer. J. Math.
31 : 4
(October 1909 ),
pp. 337–354 .
MR
1506079
JFM
40.0157.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Consider a system \( S \) of forms \( f_1,\dots, \) \( f_s \) on \( m \) variables, where \( f_i \) is the general polynomial of degree \( d_i \) , having as coefficients arbitrary parameters in any given field \( F \) , finite or infinite. Let \( L \) be any given group of \( m \) -ary linear homogeneous transformations with coefficients in \( F \) . The particular systems \( S^{\prime} \) , \( S^{\prime\prime},\dots, \) obtained from the general system \( S \) by assigning to the coefficients particular sets of values in the field, may be separated into classes \( C_i \) under the group \( L \) , such that \( S^{\prime} \) and \( S^{\prime\prime} \) belong to the same class if and only if they are equivalent under \( L \) .
We shall employ the term function in Dirichlet’s sense of correspondence and shall consider only single-valued functions taking exclusively values in the field \( F \) .
Let the function \( \phi \) have one and only one value in the field for each of the systems \( S^{\prime} \) , \( S^{\prime\prime},\dots \) . In particular, if, for each \( i \) , \( \phi \) has the same value \( v_i \) for all the systems in the class \( C_i \) , then \( \phi \) is an invariant under the group \( L \) .
For a finite field such that an invariant is a rational integral function of the coefficients of \( S \) , an explicit expression for which is given in \( \S4 \) . More convenient expressions may be given when \( S \) is a special system (§§10–18).
@article {key1506079m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {A theory of invariants},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {31},
NUMBER = {4},
MONTH = {October},
YEAR = {1909},
PAGES = {337--354},
DOI = {10.2307/2369881},
NOTE = {MR:1506079. JFM:40.0157.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Lower limit for the number of sets of solutions of \( x^e+y^e+z^e \equiv 0 \) (mod \( p \) ) ,”
J. Reine Angew. Math.
135
(1909 ),
pp. 181–188 .
JFM
40.0254.04
article
BibTeX
@article {key40.0254.04j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Lower limit for the number of sets of
solutions of \$x^e+y^e+z^e \equiv 0\$
(mod \$p\$)},
JOURNAL = {J. Reine Angew. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Journal f\"ur die Reine und Angewandte
Mathematik},
VOLUME = {135},
YEAR = {1909},
PAGES = {181--188},
NOTE = {JFM:40.0254.04.},
ISSN = {0075-4102},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On certain diophantine equations ,”
Messenger of Mathematics
39
(1909 ),
pp. 86–87 .
JFM
40.0254.03
article
BibTeX
@article {key40.0254.03j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On certain diophantine equations},
JOURNAL = {Messenger of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {39},
YEAR = {1909},
PAGES = {86--87},
NOTE = {JFM:40.0254.03.},
ISSN = {0314-0860},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“General theory of modular invariants ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
10 : 2
(1909 ),
pp. 123–158 .
MR
1500831
JFM
40.0158.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The discovery of the fundamental theorems, established in the first part of the present paper, on the invariants of a general system of \( s \) forms under linear transformations in a finite field was the outcome of a new standpoint for the consideration of modular invariants. In former papers on the subject (cited later), the test for the invariance of a polynomial consisted in a more or less direct verification that it remained unaltered, up to a power of the determinant of the transformation, under the general linear group \( G \) in the field; instead of certain generators of the latter, the corresponding annihilators were employed. In the present paper, the transformation concept is employed only to furnish a complete set of non-equivalent classes \( C_0,\dots, \) \( C_{f-1} \) of systems of \( s \) forms under the group \( G \) . Thus the test for the absolute invariance of a polynomial \( P \) is that \( P \) shall take the same value for all systems of a forms in a class. It is shown in §4 that the number of linearly independent absolute invariants equals the number \( f \) of classes under the total group \( G \) . In §6 it is shown that the number of linearly independent invariants, including both absolute and relative, equals the number of classes under the group \( G_1 \) of transformations of determinant unity; it is furthermore specified which of the invariants under \( G_1 \) are invariants of the \( s \) forms.
The general theory is applied in §§8, 9, 16–19 to the determination of all the invariants of the general \( m \) -ary quadratic form in the Galois field of order \( p^n \) and in §§22–26 to the construction of all invariants of the binary cubic form in the \( \mathit{GF}[p^n] \) . For the practical construction of the invariants, there is developed a uniform process, of function-theoretic nature, for the conversion of non-invariantive characterizations of the classes into invariantive characterizations. The intervening sections are devoted to the determination and characterization of the classes of the forms under investigation. A mere list of canonical types of forms is not sufficient. For \( m \) -ary quadratic forms in the \( \mathit{GF}[2^n] \) such a list has been given by the author [1899, p. 222]; to obtain necessary and sufficient criteria for each class, a new theory for such forms has been constructed in §§10–15. Also for binary cubic forms, the case (§26) in which the modulus \( p \) equals \( {}2 \) is more intricate than the general case \( p > 2 \) . The nature of the invariants is quite different in the two cases, a result to be anticipated for quadratic forms, but rather surprising for cubic forms. The consequent assignment of such a large part of the present paper to the special case \( p = 2 \) was made not merely for the sake of completeness, but rather on account of the very prominent rôle which the linear groups with modulus \( {}2 \) play in the applications [Jordan 1870, p. 313, p. 329] to geometry and in the general theory of linear groups.
@article {key1500831m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {General theory of modular invariants},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {10},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1909},
PAGES = {123--158},
DOI = {10.2307/1988679},
NOTE = {MR:1500831. JFM:40.0158.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Definite forms in a finite field ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
10 : 1
(1909 ),
pp. 109–122 .
MR
1500830
JFM
40.0268.03
article
BibTeX
@article {key1500830m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Definite forms in a finite field},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {10},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1909},
PAGES = {109--122},
DOI = {10.2307/1988725},
NOTE = {MR:1500830. JFM:40.0268.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Rational reduction of a pair of binary quadratic forms; their modular invariants ,”
Amer. J. Math.
31 : 2
(April 1909 ),
pp. 103–146 .
MR
1506065
JFM
40.0161.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The primary object of the present paper is a study of the invariants of a pair of binary quadratic forms under modular transformation. Incidentally, the invariants of a single form are given a more satisfactory expression than hitherto employed (§7).
It is shown that the knowledge of a complete set of canonical types of pairs of forms is of great service in the discovery and proof of relations between certain of the modular invariants and in establishing the independence of other invariants (§§23,25). For these reasons and for the purpose of giving interpretations to the modular invariants, we begin the investigation with a discussion of the necessary and sufficient conditions for the equivalence of two pairs of quadratic forms.
@article {key1506065m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Rational reduction of a pair of binary
quadratic forms; their modular invariants},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {31},
NUMBER = {2},
MONTH = {April},
YEAR = {1909},
PAGES = {103--146},
DOI = {10.2307/2370100},
NOTE = {MR:1506065. JFM:40.0161.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Diophantische Approximationen: Eine Einführung in die Zahlentheorie ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
15 : 5
(1909 ),
pp. 251–252 .
Book by H. Minkowski (Teubner, 1907).
MR
1558750
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1558750m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {D}iophantische {A}pproximationen:
{E}ine {E}inf\"uhrung in die {Z}ahlentheorie},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {15},
NUMBER = {5},
YEAR = {1909},
PAGES = {251--252},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1909-01753-7},
NOTE = {Book by H.~Minkowski (Teubner, 1907).
MR:1558750.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Modular invariants of a general system of linear forms ,”
Proc. London Math. Soc.
7 : 1
(1909 ),
pp. 430–444 .
MR
1575684
JFM
40.0160.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
@article {key1575684m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Modular invariants of a general system
of linear forms},
JOURNAL = {Proc. London Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Proceedings of the London Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {7},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1909},
PAGES = {430--444},
DOI = {10.1112/plms/s2-7.1.430},
NOTE = {MR:1575684. JFM:40.0160.01.},
ISSN = {0024-6115},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Manuscrits de Evariste Galois ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
15 : 5
(1909 ),
pp. 249–250 .
Book by J. Tannery (Gauthier-Villars, 1908).
MR
1558749
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1558749m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {M}anuscrits de {E}variste
{G}alois},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {15},
NUMBER = {5},
YEAR = {1909},
PAGES = {249--250},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1909-01752-5},
NOTE = {Book by J.~Tannery (Gauthier-Villars,
1908). MR:1558749.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: The collected mathematical papers of James Joseph Sylvester (Vols. I and II) ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
15 : 5
(1909 ),
pp. 232–239 .
Books by H. F. Baker (Cambridge University Press, 1904 and 1908).
A review of Volume III was published in Bull. Am. Math. Soc. 17 :5 (1911) .
MR
1558745
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1558745m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {T}he collected mathematical
papers of {J}ames {J}oseph {S}ylvester
({V}ols.~{I} and {II})},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {15},
NUMBER = {5},
YEAR = {1909},
PAGES = {232--239},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1909-01746-X},
NOTE = {Books by H.~F. Baker (Cambridge University
Press, 1904 and 1908). A review of Volume
III was published in \textit{Bull. Am.
Math. Soc.} \textbf{17}:5 (1911). MR:1558745.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the factorization of integral functions with \( p \) -adic coefficients ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
17 : 1
(1910 ),
pp. 19–23 .
MR
1558975
JFM
41.0229.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
If \( F(X) \) is an integral function of degree \( n \) with integral \( p \) -adic coefficients, then for any integer \( k \) we have a congruence
\begin{align*} F(x) &\equiv F^{(k)}(x) \pmod{p^{k+1}}\\ & = F_0(x) + pF_1(x) + p^2F_2(x) + \cdots +p^kF_k(x), \end{align*}
in which each \( F_i(x) \) is an integral function of degree \( {}\leq n \) with coefficients belonging to the set \( {}0 \) , \( {}1,\dots, \) \( p-1 \) . The function \( F^{(k)}(x) \) is called the convergent of rank \( k \) of \( F(x) \) . If
\begin{equation*}\tag{1} F(x)-f(x).g(x) \mod{p} \end{equation*}
in which the factors are integral functions with integral \( p \) -adic coefficients, then for any integer \( k \) we obviously have
\[ F^{(k)}(x) \equiv f^{(k)}(x)\cdot g^{(k)}(x) \mod{p^{k+1}} \]
The following converse theorem plays a fundamental rôle in Hensel’s new theory of algebraic numbers [1908, p. 71]: If
\[ F(x) \equiv f_0(x)\cdot g_0(x) \mod{p^{s+1}} \]
for \( s + 1 > 2\rho \) , where \( \rho \) is the order of the resultant \( R \) of \( f_0(x) \) and \( g_0(x) \) , then \( F(x) \) is the product (1) of two integral functions with integral \( p \) -adic coefficients whose convergents of rank \( s - \rho \) are \( f_0(x) \) and \( g_0(x) \) .
Hensel’s proof is in effect a process to construct the successive convergents of \( f(x) \) and \( g(x) \) . Each step of the process requires the solution of a linear equation in two unknowns with \( p \) -adic coefficients. The object of this note is to furnish a decidedly simpler process, which dispenses with these linear equations, and requires only the solution of a single linear congruence.
@article {key1558975m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On the factorization of integral functions
with \$p\$-adic coefficients},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {17},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1910},
PAGES = {19--23},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1910-01990-X},
NOTE = {MR:1558975. JFM:41.0229.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Factor table for the first ten millions ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
17 : 1
(1910 ),
pp. 36–38 .
Book by D. N. Lehmer (Carnegie Institution, 1909).
MR
1558977
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1558977m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {F}actor table for the
first ten millions},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {17},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1910},
PAGES = {36--38},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1910-01995-9},
NOTE = {Book by D.~N. Lehmer (Carnegie Institution,
1909). MR:1558977.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Theorie der Algebraischen Zahlen ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
17 : 1
(1910 ),
pp. 23–36 .
Book by K. Hensel (Teubner, 1908).
MR
1558976
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1558976m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {T}heorie der {A}lgebraischen
{Z}ahlen},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {17},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1910},
PAGES = {23--36},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1910-01993-5},
NOTE = {Book by K.~Hensel (Teubner, 1908). MR:1558976.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On non-vanishing forms ,”
Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.
42
(1911 ),
pp. 162–171 .
JFM
42.0138.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key42.0138.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On non-vanishing forms},
JOURNAL = {Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Quarterly Journal of Pure and Applied
Mathematics},
VOLUME = {42},
YEAR = {1911},
PAGES = {162--171},
NOTE = {JFM:42.0138.01.},
ISSN = {1549-6724},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Festschrift zur Feier des 100 Geburtstages Eduard Kummers mit Briefen an seine Mutter und an Leopold Kronecker ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
17 : 7
(1911 ),
pp. 371–372 .
Book by K. Hensel (Teubner, 1910).
MR
1559074
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1559074m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {F}estschrift zur {F}eier
des 100 {G}eburtstages {E}duard {K}ummers
mit {B}riefen an seine {M}utter und
an {L}eopold {K}ronecker},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {17},
NUMBER = {7},
YEAR = {1911},
PAGES = {371--372},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1911-02084-5},
NOTE = {Book by K.~Hensel (Teubner, 1910). MR:1559074.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Note on cubic equations and congruences ,”
Ann. Math. (2)
12 : 3
(April 1911 ),
pp. 149–152 .
MR
1503562
JFM
42.0214.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In the Annals for January, 1910, Mr. Escott has given certain cubic functions, for which the corresponding algebraic equations have either three real roots or no real root, while the corresponding congruences have either three integral roots or no integral root. He did not, however, determine in what cases the roots of the congruences are integral and in what cases not integral. This problem will be treated here by two methods.
@article {key1503562m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Note on cubic equations and congruences},
JOURNAL = {Ann. Math. (2)},
FJOURNAL = {Annals of Mathematics. Second Series},
VOLUME = {12},
NUMBER = {3},
MONTH = {April},
YEAR = {1911},
PAGES = {149--152},
DOI = {10.2307/2007243},
NOTE = {MR:1503562. JFM:42.0214.02.},
ISSN = {0003-486X},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Notes on the theory of numbers ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
18 : 5
(May 1911 ),
pp. 109–111 .
MR
1517545
JFM
42.0236.12
article
BibTeX
@article {key1517545m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Notes on the theory of numbers},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {18},
NUMBER = {5},
MONTH = {May},
YEAR = {1911},
PAGES = {109--111},
DOI = {10.2307/2974159},
NOTE = {MR:1517545. JFM:42.0236.12.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Note on modular invariants ,”
Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.
42
(1911 ),
pp. 158–161 .
JFM
42.0137.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key42.0137.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Note on modular invariants},
JOURNAL = {Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Quarterly Journal of Pure and Applied
Mathematics},
VOLUME = {42},
YEAR = {1911},
PAGES = {158--161},
NOTE = {JFM:42.0137.01.},
ISSN = {1549-6724},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“An invariantive investigation of irreducible binary modular forms ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
12 : 1
(1911 ),
pp. 1–18 .
MR
1500877
JFM
42.0134.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
A fundamental system of invariants of the group of all binary linear transformations in a finite field is shown in §§2–6 to consist of two invariants, one the product of the distinct linear forms and the other the product of the distinct irreducible quadratic forms, where in each case no two factors have a constant ratio. The product \( \pi_m \) of the irreducible forms of degree \( m \) can be expressed in terms of the fundamental invariants; this is accomplished in §§7–9 by means of the remarkable three-term recursion formula (15).
Two forms shall be said to belong to the same class if and only if one of them can be transformed into a constant multiple of the other by a linear transformation of determinant unity in the field. It is shown in §10 that there are as many classes of irreducible binary forms of degree \( m \) as there are irreducible factors of \( \pi_m \) when expressed as a function of a certain pair of invariants. The choice of the latter is different in the two cases, \( p = 2 \) , \( p > 2 \) , where \( p \) is the modulus of the field; this is due to the fact that, in the respective cases, there are one or two similarity transformations of determinant unity. The investigation is completed for the values of \( m \) less than \( {}8 \) . The difficulties encountered increase as the number of factors of \( m \) increases. Certain problems arise for which the present invariantive theory affords an indirect solution, whereas a direct solution appears to be quite difficult (cf. end of §10, and end of §17). For \( m = 6 \) , it was necessary to enumerate the irreducible cubics in the \( \mathit{GF}[p^n] \) whose roots are squares in the \( \mathit{GF}[p^{3n}] \) and have a given sum.
@article {key1500877m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {An invariantive investigation of irreducible
binary modular forms},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {12},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1911},
PAGES = {1--18},
DOI = {10.2307/1988731},
NOTE = {MR:1500877. JFM:42.0134.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A fundamental system of invariants of the general modular linear group with a solution of the form problem ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
12 : 1
(1911 ),
pp. 75–98 .
MR
1500882
JFM
42.0136.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
We shall determine \( m \) functions which form a fundamental system of invariants for the group \( G_m \) of all linear homogeneous transformations on \( m \) variables with coefficients in the Galois field of order \( p^n \) . In the so-called form problem for the group \( G_m \) , we seek all sets of values of the \( m \) variables for which the \( m \) fundamental absolute invariants take assigned values. It is shown in §8 that all sets of solutions are linear combinations of the roots of an equation involving only the powers \( p^{nm} \) , \( p^{n(m-1)},\dots, \) \( p^n \) , \( {}1 \) of a single variable. This fundamental equation has properties analogous to those of a linear differential equation of the \( m \) -th order. In §§10–16 we determine the degrees of the irreducible factors of the fundamental equation and, in particular, the smallest field in which it is completely solvable. We obtain a wide generalization of the theory of the equation \( \xi^{p^{nm}}-\xi = 0 \) , which forms the basis of the theory of finite fields. The function defined by the left member of the fundamental equation includes the type of substitution quantics in one variable the theory of which is equivalent to, but preceded historically, the theory of linear modular substitutions on m variables. We here find that the latter theory necessitates a return to the earlier quantics in one variable. Finally, in §§17–22, we consider the interpretation of certain invariants.
@article {key1500882m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {A fundamental system of invariants of
the general modular linear group with
a solution of the form problem},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {12},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1911},
PAGES = {75--98},
DOI = {10.2307/1988736},
NOTE = {MR:1500882. JFM:42.0136.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Binary modular groups and their invariants ,”
Amer. J. Math.
33 : 1–4
(January 1911 ),
pp. 175–192 .
MR
1507890
JFM
42.0157.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In the first part of this paper I determine all subgroups of the group \( \Gamma \) composed of all binary transformations of determinant unity with coefficients in the Galois field \( F \) of order \( p^n \) . The order of \( \Gamma \) is
\[ \omega = p^n(p^{2n} - 1). \]
I determined the subgroups of \( \Gamma \) in the spring of 1904 and made use of the results in investigating [1905a, 1906] the subgroups of the general ternary and quaternary linear groups modulo \( p \) , as well as in my study of finite algebras [1905b].
The subgroups of \( \Gamma \) may be derived (as in §9) from the subgroups of the linear fractional group. We may however proceed independently (§§2–7). The latter method naturally brings out more clearly the properties of the homogeneous groups, and moreover furnishes material needed in the construction of the invariants (§§10–13). The linear fractional groups may be derived by inspection from the homogeneous groups.
The exceptional character of the case \( p=2 \) is more marked in the case of homogeneous groups than in the case of fractional groups. Moreover, the homogeneous and fractional groups are identical if \( p=2 \) . For these reasons I assume here that \( p > 2 \) .
@article {key1507890m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Binary modular groups and their invariants},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {33},
NUMBER = {1--4},
MONTH = {January},
YEAR = {1911},
PAGES = {175--192},
DOI = {10.2307/2369991},
NOTE = {MR:1507890. JFM:42.0157.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Diophantus of Alexandria ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
18 : 2
(1911 ),
pp. 82–83 .
Book by T. L. Heath (Cambridge Univ. Press, 1910).
MR
1559140
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1559140m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {D}iophantus of {A}lexandria},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {18},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1911},
PAGES = {82--83},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1911-02159-0},
NOTE = {Book by T.~L. Heath (Cambridge Univ.
Press, 1910). MR:1559140.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Niedere Zahlentheorie, zweiter Teil ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
17 : 5
(1911 ),
pp. 255–256 .
Book by P. Bachman (Teubner, 1910).
MR
1559037
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1559037m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {N}iedere {Z}ahlentheorie,
zweiter {T}eil},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {17},
NUMBER = {5},
YEAR = {1911},
PAGES = {255--256},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1911-02041-9},
NOTE = {Book by P.~Bachman (Teubner, 1910).
MR:1559037.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: The collected mathematical papers of James Joseph Sylvester (Vol. III) ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
17 : 5
(1911 ),
pp. 254–255 .
Book by H. F. Baker (Cambridge University Press, 1909).
A review of Volumes I and II was published in Bull. Am. Math. Soc. 15 :5 (1909) .
MR
1559036
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1559036m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {T}he collected mathematical
papers of {J}ames {J}oseph {S}ylvester
({V}ol.~{III})},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {17},
NUMBER = {5},
YEAR = {1911},
PAGES = {254--255},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1911-02040-7},
NOTE = {Book by H.~F.~Baker (Cambridge University
Press, 1909). A review of Volumes I
and II was published in \textit{Bull.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{15}:5 (1909).
MR:1559036.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the negative discriminants for which there is a single class of positive primitive binary quadratic forms ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
17 : 10
(1911 ),
pp. 534–537 .
MR
1559109
JFM
42.0239.06
article
BibTeX
@article {key1559109m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On the negative discriminants for which
there is a single class of positive
primitive binary quadratic forms},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {17},
NUMBER = {10},
YEAR = {1911},
PAGES = {534--537},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1911-02102-4},
NOTE = {MR:1559109. JFM:42.0239.06.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Linear algebras ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
13 : 1
(1912 ),
pp. 59–73 .
MR
1500905
JFM
43.0162.09
article
Abstract
BibTeX
@article {key1500905m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Linear algebras},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {13},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1912},
PAGES = {59--73},
DOI = {10.2307/1988614},
NOTE = {MR:1500905. JFM:43.0162.09.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Essai de géométrie analytique modulaire a deux dimensions ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
20 : 2
(1913 ),
pp. 96–97 .
Book by G. Arnoux (Gauthier-Villars, 1911).
MR
1559428
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1559428m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {E}ssai de g\'eom\'etrie
analytique modulaire a deux dimensions},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {20},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1913},
PAGES = {96--97},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1913-02443-1},
NOTE = {Book by G.~Arnoux (Gauthier-Villars,
1911). MR:1559428.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the rank of a symmetrical matrix ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
19 : 9
(1913 ),
pp. 456 .
Abstract only.
Abstract for article in Ann. Math. 15 :1–4 (1913–1914) .
JFM
44.0177.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
@article {key44.0177.03j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On the rank of a symmetrical matrix},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {19},
NUMBER = {9},
YEAR = {1913},
PAGES = {456},
URL = {http://www.ams.org/journals/bull/1913-19-09/S0002-9904-1913-02394-2/S0002-9904-1913-02394-2.pdf},
NOTE = {Abstract only. Abstract for article
in \textit{Ann. Math.} \textbf{15}:1--4
(1913--1914). JFM:44.0177.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Even abundant numbers ,”
Amer. J. Math.
35 : 4
(October 1913 ),
pp. 423–426 .
MR
1506195
JFM
44.0221.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1506195m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Even abundant numbers},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {35},
NUMBER = {4},
MONTH = {October},
YEAR = {1913},
PAGES = {423--426},
DOI = {10.2307/2370406},
NOTE = {MR:1506195. JFM:44.0221.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Proof of the finiteness of modular covariants ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
14 : 3
(1913 ),
pp. 299–310 .
An abstract was published in Bull. Am. Math. Soc. 19 :9 (1913) .
MR
1500948
article
Abstract
BibTeX
It is shown that all rational integral modular covariants of a system of forms in \( n \) variables are rational integral functions of a finite number of such modular covariants. The proof makes use of the universal covariants [1911] of the general linear modular group and of a lemma [1913] which states that any set of monomial functions of \( n \) variables contains a finite number of functions \( M_1,\dots, \) \( M_f \) , such that any function of the set is the product of some \( M_i \) by a monomial function.
@article {key1500948m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Proof of the finiteness of modular covariants},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {14},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1913},
PAGES = {299--310},
DOI = {10.2307/1988598},
NOTE = {An abstract was published in \textit{Bull.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{19}:9 (1913).
MR:1500948.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Finiteness of the odd perfect and primitive abundant numbers with \( n \) distinct prime factors ,”
Bull. Amer. Math. Soc.
19 : 6
(1913 ),
pp. 285 .
Abstract for article in Amer. J. Math. 35 :4 (1913) .
JFM
44.0220.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Denote by \( \sigma(a) \) the sum of all the divisors of a positive integer \( a \) . Then \( a \) is called abundant, perfect, or deficient, according as
\[ \sigma(a) > 2a,\ = 2a,\ < 2a, \]
respectively.
A non-deficient number will be called primitive if it is not a multiple of a smaller non-deficient number.
There is only a finite number of primitive non-deficient odd numbers having any given number of distinct prime factors.
There is not an infinitude of odd perfect numbers with any given number of distinct prime factors.
@article {key44.0220.02j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Finiteness of the odd perfect and primitive
abundant numbers with \$n\$ distinct prime
factors},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Amer. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {19},
NUMBER = {6},
YEAR = {1913},
PAGES = {285},
URL = {http://www.ams.org/journals/bull/1913-19-06/S0002-9904-1913-02330-9/S0002-9904-1913-02330-9.pdf},
NOTE = {Abstract for article in \textit{Amer.
J. Math.} \textbf{35}:4 (1913). JFM:44.0220.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On binary modular groups and their invariants ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
20 : 3
(1913 ),
pp. 132–134 .
MR
1559435
JFM
44.0169.05
article
Abstract
BibTeX
@article {key1559435m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On binary modular groups and their invariants},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {20},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1913},
PAGES = {132--134},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1913-02445-5},
NOTE = {MR:1559435. JFM:44.0169.05.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Theorems and tables on the sum of the divisors of a number ,”
Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.
44
(1913 ),
pp. 264–296 .
JFM
44.0221.02
article
BibTeX
@article {key44.0221.02j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Theorems and tables on the sum of the
divisors of a number},
JOURNAL = {Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Quarterly Journal of Pure and Applied
Mathematics},
VOLUME = {44},
YEAR = {1913},
PAGES = {264--296},
NOTE = {JFM:44.0221.02.},
ISSN = {1549-6724},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Amicable number triples ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
20 : 3
(1913 ),
pp. 84–92 .
MR
1517797
JFM
44.0247.13
article
BibTeX
@article {key1517797m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Amicable number triples},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {20},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1913},
PAGES = {84--92},
DOI = {10.2307/2973442},
NOTE = {MR:1517797. JFM:44.0247.13.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
CODEN = {AMMYAE},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The invariants, semivariants and linear covariants of the binary quartic form modulo \( {}2 \) ,”
Ann. Math. (2)
15 : 1–4
(1913–1914 ),
pp. 114–117 .
MR
1502467
JFM
45.0210.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1502467m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The invariants, semivariants and linear
covariants of the binary quartic form
modulo \${}2\$},
JOURNAL = {Ann. Math. (2)},
FJOURNAL = {Annals of Mathematics. Second Series},
VOLUME = {15},
NUMBER = {1--4},
YEAR = {1913--1914},
PAGES = {114--117},
DOI = {10.2307/1967806},
NOTE = {MR:1502467. JFM:45.0210.01.},
ISSN = {0003-486X},
CODEN = {ANMAAH},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Geometrie der Zahlen ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
21 : 3
(1914 ),
pp. 131–132 .
Book by H. Minkowski (Teubner, 1910).
MR
1559582
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1559582m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {G}eometrie der {Z}ahlen},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {21},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1914},
PAGES = {131--132},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1914-02597-2},
NOTE = {Book by H.~Minkowski (Teubner, 1910).
MR:1559582.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Linear associative algebras and abelian equations ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
15 : 1
(1914 ),
pp. 31–46 .
MR
1500963
JFM
45.0189.03
article
BibTeX
@article {key1500963m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Linear associative algebras and abelian
equations},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {15},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1914},
PAGES = {31--46},
DOI = {10.2307/1988689},
NOTE = {MR:1500963. JFM:45.0189.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the trisection of an angle and the construction of regular polygons of \( {}7 \) and \( {}9 \) sides ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
21 : 8
(1914 ),
pp. 259–262 .
MR
1518094
JFM
45.0753.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1518094m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On the trisection of an angle and the
construction of regular polygons of
\${}7\$ and \${}9\$ sides},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {21},
NUMBER = {8},
YEAR = {1914},
PAGES = {259--262},
DOI = {10.2307/2974246},
NOTE = {MR:1518094. JFM:45.0753.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
CODEN = {AMMYAE},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Invariants in the theory of numbers ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
15 : 4
(1914 ),
pp. 497–503 .
MR
1500992
JFM
45.0207.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Polynomials in the coefficients of a form \( f(x_1,\dots, \) \( x_n) \) which have the invariantive property with respect to all linear homogeneous transformations on \( x_1,\dots, \) \( x_n \) with integral coefficients taken modulo \( p \) , where \( p \) is a prime, are called formal invariants modulo \( p \) of \( f \) if the coefficients of \( f \) are independent variables, but are called modular invariants if the coefficients of \( f \) are integers taken modulo \( p \) . The concept of formal invariants modulo \( p \) was introduced by Hurwitz [1903, p. 25]; but the only known results concerning them relate to the binary quadratic and cubic forms. On the contrary, a simple and effective theory of modular invariants has been given by the writer. A new method of deriving modular invariants from seminvariants is given in §8. But the main purpose of this paper is to present a simple general method of constructing formal invariants. The method is applicable also to formal seminvariants and, more generally, to the invariants of any linear congruence group (§7). Moreover, the new point of view forms an adequate basis for a general theory of formal invariants.
@article {key1500992m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Invariants in the theory of numbers},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {15},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1914},
PAGES = {497--503},
DOI = {10.2307/1988800},
NOTE = {MR:1500992. JFM:45.0207.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
Algebraic invariants .
Mathematical monographs 14 .
J. Wiley & Sons (New York ),
1914 .
JFM
45.0196.10
book
BibTeX
@book {key45.0196.10j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Algebraic invariants},
SERIES = {Mathematical monographs},
NUMBER = {14},
PUBLISHER = {J. Wiley \& Sons},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1914},
PAGES = {x+100},
NOTE = {JFM:45.0196.10.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
Linear algebras .
Cambridge Tracts in Mathematics and Mathematical Physics 16 .
Cambridge University Press ,
1914 .
Republished in 1960 .
JFM
45.0189.01
book
BibTeX
@book {key45.0189.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Linear algebras},
SERIES = {Cambridge Tracts in Mathematics and
Mathematical Physics},
NUMBER = {16},
PUBLISHER = {Cambridge University Press},
YEAR = {1914},
PAGES = {viii+73},
NOTE = {Republished in 1960. JFM:45.0189.01.},
ISSN = {0068-6824},
}
L. E. Dickson :
Elementary theory of equations .
J. Wiley & Sons (New York ),
1914 .
JFM
45.0162.02
book
BibTeX
@book {key45.0162.02j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Elementary theory of equations},
PUBLISHER = {J. Wiley \& Sons},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1914},
PAGES = {v+184},
NOTE = {JFM:45.0162.02.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Zahlentheorie ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
20 : 5
(1914 ),
pp. 258–259 .
Book by K. Hensel (Göschen, 1913).
MR
1559479
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1559479m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {Z}ahlentheorie},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {20},
NUMBER = {5},
YEAR = {1914},
PAGES = {258--259},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1914-02480-2},
NOTE = {Book by K.~Hensel (G\"oschen, 1913).
MR:1559479.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Modular invariants of the system of a binary cubic, quadratic and linear form ,”
Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.
45
(1914 ),
pp. 373–384 .
JFM
45.1236.02
article
BibTeX
@article {key45.1236.02j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Modular invariants of the system of
a binary cubic, quadratic and linear
form},
JOURNAL = {Quart. J. Pure Appl. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {Quarterly Journal of Pure and Applied
Mathematics},
VOLUME = {45},
YEAR = {1914},
PAGES = {373--384},
NOTE = {JFM:45.1236.02.},
ISSN = {1549-6724},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The points of inflexion of a plane cubic curve ,”
Ann. Math. (2)
16 : 1–4
(1914–15 ),
pp. 50–66 .
MR
1502488
JFM
45.0838.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The object of the first half of this paper is to give a self-contained and elementary exposition of the geometrical side of the theory of the inflexion points of a cubic curve without singular points. The object of the second half is to present the algebraic side of the theory, including proofs that the equation \( X \) of the ninth degree to which the problem leads is solvable by radicals, a determination of the Galois group of \( X \) for certain special cubic curves and for the general one, and a proof that \( X \) can be solved by means of a quartic and two cubic equations and hence by means of three cube roots and four square roots, no one of which can be dispensed with in general.
This interesting problem affords an excellent illustration of the complete mastery over an intricate algebraic situation which is possible by the use of Galois’ theory of algebraic equations. Readers having little or no aquaintance with that theory will be able to see from this illuminating concrete example what the theory really means and what it can accomplish.
While the earlier results in the present paper are classic, the methods employed are largely novel and the exposition is expecially elementary. The material in §§11–15 relating to the definitive determination of the Galois group is believed to be new.
@article {key1502488m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The points of inflexion of a plane cubic
curve},
JOURNAL = {Ann. Math. (2)},
FJOURNAL = {Annals of Mathematics. Second Series},
VOLUME = {16},
NUMBER = {1--4},
YEAR = {1914--15},
PAGES = {50--66},
DOI = {10.2307/1968042},
NOTE = {MR:1502488. JFM:45.0838.02.},
ISSN = {0003-486X},
CODEN = {ANMAAH},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Projective classification of cubic surfaces modulo \( {}2 \) ,”
Ann. Math. (2)
16 : 1–4
(1914–1915 ),
pp. 139–157 .
MR
1502501
JFM
45.0212.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1502501m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Projective classification of cubic surfaces
modulo \${}2\$},
JOURNAL = {Ann. Math. (2)},
FJOURNAL = {Annals of Mathematics. Second Series},
VOLUME = {16},
NUMBER = {1--4},
YEAR = {1914--1915},
PAGES = {139--157},
DOI = {10.2307/1968056},
NOTE = {MR:1502501. JFM:45.0212.01.},
ISSN = {0003-486X},
CODEN = {ANMAAH},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Invariants, seminvariants, and covariants of the ternary and quaternary quadratic form modulo \( {}2 \) ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
21 : 4
(1915 ),
pp. 174–179 .
MR
1559607
JFM
45.0208.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
A simple and complete theory of seminvariants of a binary form modulo \( p \) was given in the writer’s second lecture at the Madison Colloquium [1914]. A fundamental system of covariants of a ternary quadratic form \( F \) modulo \( {}2 \) was obtained in the fourth lecture. In place of the method employed there (pages 77–79) to obtain the leading coefficient of a covariant of \( F \) , we shall now present a simpler method which makes it practicable to treat also the corresponding question for quaternary quadratic forms. The new method is, moreover, in closer accord with the underlying principle of those lectures, viz., to place the burden of the determination of the modular invariants upon the separation of the ground forms into classes of forms equivalent under linear transformation. By making the utmost use of this principle, we shall obtain a simpler solution of the problem for the ternary case and then treat the new quaternary case.
@article {key1559607m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Invariants, seminvariants, and covariants
of the ternary and quaternary quadratic
form modulo \${}2\$},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {21},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1915},
PAGES = {174--179},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1915-02591-7},
NOTE = {MR:1559607. JFM:45.0208.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The straight lines on modular cubic surfaces ,”
Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.
1 : 4
(April 1915 ),
pp. 248–253 .
JFM
45.0212.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In ordinary space a cubic surface without singular points contains exactly \( {}27 \) straight lines, of which \( {}27 \) , \( {}15 \) , \( {}7 \) , or \( {}3 \) are real; there are \( {}45 \) sets of three coplanar lines, the three of no set being concurrent. In modular space, in which the coordinates of points and the coefficients of the equations of lines or surfaces are integers or Galois imaginaries taken modulo \( {}2 \) , it is interesting to notice that three coplanar lines on a cubic surface may be concurrent (§2). A point with integral coordinates is called real. A line or surface is called real if the coefficients of its equations are integers. In space with modulus \( {}2 \) , the number of real straight lines on a cubic surface without singular points is \( {}15 \) , \( {}9 \) , \( {}5 \) , \( {}3 \) , \( {}2 \) , \( {}1 \) , or \( {}0 \) .
We shall give here an elementary, self-contained, investigation of some of the most interesting cubic surfaces modulo \( {}2 \) . A complete classification of all such surfaces under real linear transformation will appear in the Annals of Mathematics , but without the present investigation of the configuration of their lines.
@article {key45.0212.02j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The straight lines on modular cubic
surfaces},
JOURNAL = {Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.},
FJOURNAL = {Proceedings of the National Academy
of Sciences of the United States of
America},
VOLUME = {1},
NUMBER = {4},
MONTH = {April},
YEAR = {1915},
PAGES = {248--253},
DOI = {10.1073/pnas.1.4.248},
NOTE = {JFM:45.0212.02.},
ISSN = {0027-8424},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Invariantive classification of pairs of conics modulo \( {}2 \) ,”
Amer. J. Math.
37 : 4
(October 1915 ),
pp. 355–358 .
An abstract was published as Bull. Am. Math. Soc. 22 :1 (1915) .
MR
1506263
JFM
45.0210.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
With a conic \( F \) modulo \( {}2 \) is associated covariantively a point \( A \) , called its apex, and a unique line \( L \) , and conversely \( A \) and \( L \) uniquely determine \( F \) (Madison Colloquium Lectures, 1914, page 69). Hence the projective classification of pairs of conics \( F \) and \( F^{\prime} \) is equivalent to that of the systems \( A \) , \( L \) , \( A^{\prime} \) , \( L^{\prime} \) of two points and two lines and the degenerate systems in which one or more of the four elements are absent. A simple geometrical discussion of such systems leads to the theorem: Two pairs of conics modulo \( {}2 \) are protectively equivalent if and only if they have the same properties as regards existence of apices and covariant lines, distinctness of apices and lines, and incidence of apices and lines. These properties are expressed analytically by very simple modular invariants, which therefore form a fundamental system of modular invariants of two conics.
@article {key1506263m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Invariantive classification of pairs
of conics modulo \${}2\$},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {37},
NUMBER = {4},
MONTH = {October},
YEAR = {1915},
PAGES = {355--358},
DOI = {10.2307/2370211},
NOTE = {An abstract was published as \textit{Bull.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{22}:1 (1915).
MR:1506263. JFM:45.0210.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Quartic curves modulo \( {}2 \) ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
16 : 2
(April 1915 ),
pp. 111–120 .
MR
1501003
JFM
45.0211.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Let \( f(x,y,z) \) be a homogeneous form of order \( n \) with integral coefficients. The ponts for which the three partial derivatives of \( f \) are congruent to zero modulo \( {}2 \) shall be called derived points. A derived point shall be called a singular point or an apex of \( f=0 \) according as it is or is not on \( f=0 \) . Apices do not arise if \( n \) is odd, since the left member of Euler’s relation
\[ x\frac{\partial f}{\partial x} + y\frac{\partial f}{\partial y} + z\frac{\partial f}{\partial z} = nf \]
is zero at a derived point and therefore also \( f \) is zero. But if \( n \) is even, a derived point may not be on \( f=0 \) and thus be an apex.
For example, any non-degenerate conic modulo \( {}2 \) can be transformed linearly into \( x^2 + yz = 0 \) . Its single derived point (\( {}100 \) ) is an apex.
Quartic curves modulo \( {}2 \) have the remarkable property of possessing at most seven bitangents (or an infinity in a special case), whereas an algebraic quartic curve possesses twenty-eight in general. For the special quartic \( \beta \) of §4, any line through the apex (\( {}001 \) ) is a bitangent, just as any line through the apex of the conic \( x^2 + yz = 0 \) is a tangent.
The number of non-equivalent types of quartic curves containing \( {}0 \) , \( {}7 \) , \( {}6 \) real points and having no real linear factor is \( {}8 \) , \( {}1 \) , \( {}6 \) , respectively. In each case, the types are completely distinguished by the number and reality of the singular points and apices. Except for two types, in which there are only two bitangents and only two derived points, the intersections of the bitangents coincide completely with the derived points. The problem is more complicated in the case of quartic curves with five real points, there being twenty-five types (§7). Quartics with \( {}1 \) , \( {}2 \) , \( {}3 \) , or \( {}4 \) real points have not been treated since they would probably not present sufficient novelty to compensate for the increased length of the investigation.
@article {key1501003m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Quartic curves modulo \${}2\$},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {16},
NUMBER = {2},
MONTH = {April},
YEAR = {1915},
PAGES = {111--120},
DOI = {10.2307/1988711},
NOTE = {MR:1501003. JFM:45.0211.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A tribute to Mildred Lenora Sanderson ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
22 : 8
(1915 ),
pp. 264 .
MR
1518319
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1518319m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A tribute to {M}ildred {L}enora {S}anderson},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {22},
NUMBER = {8},
YEAR = {1915},
PAGES = {264},
URL = {http://www.jstor.org/stable/2971854},
NOTE = {MR:1518319.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
CODEN = {AMMYAE},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the relation between linear algebras and continuous groups ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
22 : 2
(1915 ),
pp. 53–61 .
MR
1559711
JFM
45.0189.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The aim of this note is to give a very elementary account of the mutual relation between any linear associative algebra (system of hypercomplex numbers) and a type of continuous groups, without presupposing on the part of the reader a knowledge of either subject. The relation in question, first observed by Poincaré, enables us to translate the concepts and theorems of the one subject into the language of the other subject. It not only doubles our total knowledge, but gives us a better insight into either subject by exhibiting it from a new point of view. Incidentally, we shall obtain several other results of general interest.
@article {key1559711m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On the relation between linear algebras
and continuous groups},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {22},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1915},
PAGES = {53--61},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1915-02715-1},
NOTE = {MR:1559711. JFM:45.0189.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Invariantive theory of plane cubic curves modulo \( {}2 \) ,”
Amer. J. Math.
37 : 2
(April 1915 ),
pp. 107–116 .
MR
1506248
JFM
45.0210.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The ten types of plane cubic curves in ordinary geometry have been characterized by invariants and covariants by Gordan [1900]. The types in modular geometry can be characterized by invariants only, the abundance of invariants making it unnecessary to resort to covariants. The most effective theory of modular invariants is that based upon a separation of the particular cases of the form in question into classes of equivalent forms.
For the present problem of cubic curves modulo \( {}2 \) , this classification is effected in §3 by means of the real points (i.e. , points with integral coördinates) on the cubic, supplemented by a determination of the real inflexion points and the real and imaginary singular points. While we could test directly each real point on the curve, not a singular point, and find whether or not it is an inflexion point, we have completed the geometrical investigation by making a determination of all of the real and imaginary inflexion points on each of the twenty-two types of cubic curves modulo \( {}2 \) . For this purpose we have set up in §2 a cubic function \( H \) , which here plays a rôle analogous to that played by the Hessian in the algebraic theory.
From the geometrical classification of the modular cubics we easily derive in §4 a fundamental system of modular invariants.
The methods employed in this paper are applicable to other problems of this nature; they indicate the decided advantage to be gained in the theory of modular invariants from modular geometry as developed by Bussey and Veblen, Coble and the writer.
@article {key1506248m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Invariantive theory of plane cubic curves
modulo \${}2\$},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {37},
NUMBER = {2},
MONTH = {April},
YEAR = {1915},
PAGES = {107--116},
DOI = {10.2307/2370419},
NOTE = {MR:1506248. JFM:45.0210.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: List of prime numbers from \( {}1 \) to \( {}10{,}006{,}721 \) ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
21 : 7
(1915 ),
pp. 355–356 .
Book by D. N. Lehmer (Carnegie Institution, 1914).
MR
1559652
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1559652m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {L}ist of prime numbers
from \${}1\$ to \${}10{,}006{,}721\$},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {21},
NUMBER = {7},
YEAR = {1915},
PAGES = {355--356},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1915-02657-1},
NOTE = {Book by D.~N. Lehmer (Carnegie Institution,
1914). MR:1559652.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Geometrical and invariantive theory of quartic curves modulo \( {}2 \) ,”
Amer. J. Math.
37 : 4
(October 1915 ),
pp. 337–354 .
MR
1507897
JFM
45.0211.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1507897m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Geometrical and invariantive theory
of quartic curves modulo \${}2\$},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {37},
NUMBER = {4},
MONTH = {October},
YEAR = {1915},
PAGES = {337--354},
DOI = {10.2307/2370210},
NOTE = {MR:1507897. JFM:45.0211.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Classification of quartic curves, modulo \( {}2 \) ,”
Messenger of Mathematics
44
(1915 ),
pp. 189–192 .
JFM
45.1235.03
article
BibTeX
@article {key45.1235.03j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Classification of quartic curves, modulo
\${}2\$},
JOURNAL = {Messenger of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {44},
YEAR = {1915},
PAGES = {189--192},
NOTE = {JFM:45.1235.03.},
ISSN = {0314-0860},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Recent progress in the theories of modular and formal invariants and in modular geometry ,”
Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.
1 : 1
(January 1915 ),
pp. 1–4 .
JFM
45.0208.02
article
BibTeX
@article {key45.0208.02j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Recent progress in the theories of modular
and formal invariants and in modular
geometry},
JOURNAL = {Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.},
FJOURNAL = {Proceedings of the National Academy
of Sciences of the United States of
America},
VOLUME = {1},
NUMBER = {1},
MONTH = {January},
YEAR = {1915},
PAGES = {1--4},
DOI = {10.1073/pnas.1.1.1},
NOTE = {JFM:45.0208.02.},
ISSN = {0027-8424},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Invariantive classification of pairs of conics modulo \( {}2 \) ,”
Bull. Amer. Math. Soc.
22 : 1
(1915 ),
pp. 4 .
Abstract only.
Abstract for article in Amer. J. Math. 37 :4 (1915) .
JFM
45.1361.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
With a conic \( F \) modulo \( {}2 \) is associated covariantively a point \( A \) , called its apex, and a unique line \( L \) , and conversely \( A \) and \( L \) uniquely determine \( F \) (Madison Colloquium Lectures, 1914, page 69). Hence the projective classification of pairs of conics \( F \) and \( F^{\prime} \) is equivalent to that of the systems \( A \) , \( L \) , \( A^{\prime} \) , \( L^{\prime} \) of two points and two lines and the degenerate systems in which one or more of the four elements are absent. A simple geometrical discussion of such systems leads to the theorem: Two pairs of conics modulo \( {}2 \) are protectively equivalent if and only if they have the same properties as regards existence of apices and covariant lines, distinctness of apices and lines, and incidence of apices and lines. These properties are expressed analytically by very simple modular invariants, which therefore form a fundamental system of modular invariants of two conics.
@article {key45.1361.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Invariantive classification of pairs
of conics modulo \${}2\$},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Amer. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {22},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1915},
PAGES = {4},
URL = {http://www.ams.org/journals/bull/1915-22-01/S0002-9904-1915-02706-0/S0002-9904-1915-02706-0.pdf},
NOTE = {Abstract only. Abstract for article
in \textit{Amer. J. Math.} \textbf{37}:4
(1915). JFM:45.1361.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book reviews: The theory of numbers and Diophantine analysis ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
22 : 6
(1916 ),
pp. 303–310 .
Books by R. D. Carmichael (Wiley, 1914 and 1915).
MR
1559782
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1559782m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book reviews: {T}he theory of numbers
and {D}iophantine analysis},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {22},
NUMBER = {6},
YEAR = {1916},
PAGES = {303--310},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1916-02783-2},
NOTE = {Books by R.~D. Carmichael (Wiley, 1914
and 1915). MR:1559782.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“An extension of the theory of numbers by means of correspondences between fields ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
23 : 3
(1916 ),
pp. 109–111 .
MR
1559876
JFM
46.0171.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1559876m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {An extension of the theory of numbers
by means of correspondences between
fields},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {23},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1916},
PAGES = {109--111},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1916-02885-0},
NOTE = {MR:1559876. JFM:46.0171.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
G. A. Miller, H. F. Blichfeldt, and L. E. Dickson :
Theory and applications of finite groups .
J. Wiley & Sons (New York ),
1916 .
Republished in 1938 and in 1961 .
JFM
46.0171.02
book
People
BibTeX
@book {key46.0171.02j,
AUTHOR = {Miller, G. A. and Blichfeldt, H. F.
and Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Theory and applications of finite groups},
PUBLISHER = {J. Wiley \& Sons},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1916},
PAGES = {xvii+390},
NOTE = {Republished in 1938 and in 1961. JFM:46.0171.02.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Fermat’s last theorem and the origin and nature of the theory of algebraic numbers ,”
Ann. Math. (2)
18 : 4
(1917 ),
pp. 161–187 .
MR
1503597
JFM
46.0268.02
article
BibTeX
@article {key1503597m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Fermat's last theorem and the origin
and nature of the theory of algebraic
numbers},
JOURNAL = {Ann. Math. (2)},
FJOURNAL = {Annals of Mathematics. Second Series},
VOLUME = {18},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1917},
PAGES = {161--187},
DOI = {10.2307/2007234},
NOTE = {MR:1503597. JFM:46.0268.02.},
ISSN = {0003-486X},
CODEN = {ANMAAH},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Vom periodischen Dezimalbruch zur Zahlentheorie ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
23 : 7
(1917 ),
pp. 324–325 .
Book by A. Leman (Teubner, 1916).
MR
1559951
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1559951m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {V}om periodischen {D}ezimalbruch
zur {Z}ahlentheorie},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {23},
NUMBER = {7},
YEAR = {1917},
PAGES = {324--325},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1917-02953-9},
NOTE = {Book by A.~Leman (Teubner, 1916). MR:1559951.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
History of the theory of numbers ,
vol. I: Divisibility and primality .
Carnegie Institution (Washington, DC ),
1919 .
See also Volume II and Volume III . Chelsea republished in 1966 . The whole series was republished in 1934 .
JFM
47.0100.04
book
BibTeX
@book {key47.0100.04j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {History of the theory of numbers},
VOLUME = {I: Divisibility and primality},
PUBLISHER = {Carnegie Institution},
ADDRESS = {Washington, DC},
YEAR = {1919},
PAGES = {xii+486},
NOTE = {See also Volume II and Volume III. Chelsea
republished in 1966. The whole series
was republished in 1934. JFM:47.0100.04.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On quaternions and their generalization and the history of the eight square theorem. Addenda. ,”
Ann. Math. (2)
20 : 4
(July 1919 ),
pp. 297 .
Addenda to article in Ann. Math. 20 :3 (1919) .
MR
1502566
article
BibTeX
@article {key1502566m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On quaternions and their generalization
and the history of the eight square
theorem. Addenda.},
JOURNAL = {Ann. Math. (2)},
FJOURNAL = {Annals of Mathematics. Second Series},
VOLUME = {20},
NUMBER = {4},
MONTH = {July},
YEAR = {1919},
PAGES = {297},
DOI = {10.2307/1967125},
NOTE = {Addenda to article in \textit{Ann. Math.}
\textbf{20}:3 (1919). MR:1502566.},
ISSN = {0003-486X},
CODEN = {ANMAAH},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On quaternions and their generalization and the history of the eight square theorem ,”
Ann. Math. (2)
20 : 3
(1919 ),
pp. 155–171 .
Addenda published in Ann. Math. 20 :4 (1919) .
MR
1502549
article
Abstract
BibTeX
We shall present the history of the generalization to four and eight squares of the familiar fomula
\begin{align*} (a^2+b^2)(\alpha^2+\beta^2) &= r^2+s^2,\\ r &= a\alpha - b\beta,\\ s &= a\beta + b\alpha, \end{align*}
and an elementary exposition of Hurwitz’s proof that such a formula holds only for \( {}2 \) , \( {}4 \) or \( {}8 \) squares. For these three cases we shall show that the formula admits of a simple interpretation concerning the norms of numbers which are ordinary complex numbers, quaternions or numbers of Cayley’s algebra with \( {}8 \) units. No knowledge of quaternions or the latter algebra will be presupposed, but their more fundamental algebraic properties will be developed in detail.
A clear exposition will be given (§§1–5) of the main results of our subject. This will be followed (§§6–28) by an account of its history, which is believed to omit no paper on the eight square theorem and its generalization.
@article {key1502549m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On quaternions and their generalization
and the history of the eight square
theorem},
JOURNAL = {Ann. Math. (2)},
FJOURNAL = {Annals of Mathematics. Second Series},
VOLUME = {20},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1919},
PAGES = {155--171},
DOI = {10.2307/1967865},
NOTE = {Addenda published in \textit{Ann. Math.}
\textbf{20}:4 (1919). MR:1502549.},
ISSN = {0003-486X},
CODEN = {ANMAAH},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Mathematics in war perspective: Presidential address delivered before the American Mathematical Society, December 27, 1918 ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
25 : 7
(1919 ),
pp. 289–311 .
MR
1560190
JFM
47.0046.06
article
BibTeX
@article {key1560190m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Mathematics in war perspective: {P}residential
address delivered before the {A}merican
{M}athematical {S}ociety, {D}ecember
27, 1918},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {25},
NUMBER = {7},
YEAR = {1919},
PAGES = {289--311},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1919-03187-5},
NOTE = {MR:1560190. JFM:47.0046.06.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Applications of the geometry of numbers to algebraic numbers ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
25 : 10
(1919 ),
pp. 453–455 .
MR
1560222
JFM
47.0894.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The geometry of numbers not only furnishes a concrete geometric image of certain fundamental theorems on algebraic numbers, but also provides a new and attractive method of proving important theorems on algebraic fields. For the sake of concreteness we shall restrict attention to the typical case of the cubic field \( F(\theta) \) , which is composed of the numbers
\[ r = X + Y\theta + Z\theta^2 ,\]
where \( X \) , \( Y \) , \( Z \) are rational numbers, and \( \theta \) is a root of a cubic equation with integral coefficients, that of \( \theta^3 \) being unity. A root of any such equation is called an integral algebraic number.
@article {key1560222m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Applications of the geometry of numbers
to algebraic numbers},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {25},
NUMBER = {10},
YEAR = {1919},
PAGES = {453--455},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1919-03223-6},
NOTE = {MR:1560222. JFM:47.0894.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Les polynomes égaux à des déterminants ,”
C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris
171
(1920 ),
pp. 1360–1362 .
JFM
47.0080.04
article
BibTeX
@article {key47.0080.04j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Les polynomes \'egaux \`a des d\'eterminants},
JOURNAL = {C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris},
FJOURNAL = {Comptes Rendus Hebdomadaires des S\'eances
de l'Acad\'emie des Sciences, Paris},
VOLUME = {171},
YEAR = {1920},
PAGES = {1360--1362},
NOTE = {JFM:47.0080.04.},
ISSN = {0001-4036},
}
L. E. Dickson :
History of the theory of numbers ,
vol. II: Diophantine analysis .
Carnegie Institution (Washington, DC ),
1920 .
See also Volume I and \xlink{Volume III|}. Chelsea republished in 1966 . The whole series was republished in 1934 .
book
BibTeX
@book {key50994317,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {History of the theory of numbers},
VOLUME = {II: Diophantine analysis},
PUBLISHER = {Carnegie Institution},
ADDRESS = {Washington, DC},
YEAR = {1920},
PAGES = {xxii+803},
NOTE = {See also Volume I and \xlink{Volume
III|}. Chelsea republished in 1966.
The whole series was republished in
1934.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Fallacies and misconceptions in Diophantine analysis ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
27 : 7
(1921 ),
pp. 312–319 .
MR
1560425
JFM
48.0137.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Numerous writers have claimed to find all integral solutions of various homogeneous equations when they have actually found merely the rational solutions, expressed by formulas involving rational parameters. They have really left untouched the more difficult problem of finding all the integral solutions exclusively. The fallacies exposed in §2 and §3 are merely particular instances of the wide-spread misconception of the problem of solving a homogeneous equation in integers. It is therefore not safe, without reexamination, to place confidence in any claim that a homogeneous equation has been completely solved in integers.
@article {key1560425m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Fallacies and misconceptions in {D}iophantine
analysis},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {27},
NUMBER = {7},
YEAR = {1921},
PAGES = {312--319},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1921-03429-X},
NOTE = {MR:1560425. JFM:48.0137.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Reducible cubic forms expressible rationally as determinants ,”
Ann. Math. (2)
23 : 1
(1921 ),
pp. 70–74 .
MR
1502596
JFM
48.0099.04
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Let \( q \) be a quadratic form in four variables with rational coefficients.
If \( q \) vanishes at some rational point having \( y=0 \) , \( yq \) is expressible rationally in determinantal form.
If \( q\neq 0 \) for every rational point having \( y\neq 0 \) , then \( yq \) is expressible rationally in determinantal form if and only if either \( yq \) is equivalent to a ternary form, or the determinant of \( q \) is the square of a rational number \( \neq 0 \) and the determinant of \( q(x,0,z,w) \) is \( \neq 0 \) .
If both of the preceding hypotheses be denied, so that \( q\neq 0 \) at every rational point having \( y=0 \) , and \( q=0 \) for some rational point having \( y\neq 0 \) , then \( yq \) is not expressible rationally in determinantal form.
@article {key1502596m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Reducible cubic forms expressible rationally
as determinants},
JOURNAL = {Ann. Math. (2)},
FJOURNAL = {Annals of Mathematics. Second Series},
VOLUME = {23},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1921},
PAGES = {70--74},
DOI = {10.2307/1967785},
NOTE = {MR:1502596. JFM:48.0099.04.},
ISSN = {0003-486X},
CODEN = {ANMAAH},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Arithmetic of quaternions ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
27 : 7
(1921 ),
pp. 300 .
Abstract only.
Abstract for article published in Proc. London Math. Soc. 20 :1 (1922) .
JFM
48.0130.06
article
Abstract
BibTeX
A. Hurwitz (Göttinger Nachrichten , 1896, p. 313) proved that the laws of arithmetic hold for integral quaternions, viz. those whose coordinates are either all integers or all halves of odd integers. Since fractions introduce an inconvenience in applications to Diophantine analysis, it is here proposed to define an integral quaternion to be one whose coordinates are all integers. It is called odd if its norm is odd. It is proved that, if at least one of two integral quaternions \( a \) and \( b \) is odd, they have a right-hand greatest common divisor \( d \) which is uniquely determined up to a unit factor (\( \pm 1 \) , \( \pm i \) , \( \pm j \) , \( \pm k \) ), and that integral quaternions \( A \) and \( B \) can be found such that \( d = Aa + Bb \) . Similarly there is a left-hand greatest common divisor expressible in the form \( a\alpha + b\beta \) . The further theory proceeds essentially as in Hurwitz’s exposition.
@article {key48.0130.06j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Arithmetic of quaternions},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {27},
NUMBER = {7},
YEAR = {1921},
PAGES = {300},
URL = {http://www.ams.org/journals/bull/1921-27-07/S0002-9904-1921-03424-0/S0002-9904-1921-03424-0.pdf},
NOTE = {Abstract only. Abstract for article
published in \textit{Proc. London Math.
Soc.} \textbf{20}:1 (1922). JFM:48.0130.06.},
ISSN = {0273-0979},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Homogeneous polynomials with a multiplication theorem ,”
pp. 215–230
in
Comptes rendus du Congrès International des Mathématiciens, 1920
(Strasbourg, 22–30 September 1920 ).
Edited by H. Villat .
Édouard Privat (Toulouse ),
1921 .
Available open access
here .
JFM
48.1134.09
incollection
People
BibTeX
@incollection {key48.1134.09j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Homogeneous polynomials with a multiplication
theorem},
BOOKTITLE = {Comptes rendus du {C}ongr\`es {I}nternational
des {M}ath\'ematiciens, 1920},
EDITOR = {Villat, Henri},
PUBLISHER = {\'Edouard Privat},
ADDRESS = {Toulouse},
YEAR = {1921},
PAGES = {215--230},
NOTE = {(Strasbourg, 22--30 September 1920).
Available open access at http://ada00.math.uni-bielefeld.de/ICM/ICM1920/Main/icm1920.0215.0230.ocr.pdf.
JFM:48.1134.09.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Quaternions and their generalizations ,”
Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.
7 : 4
(1921 ),
pp. 109–114 .
JFM
48.0125.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The discovery of quaternions by W. R. Hamilton in 1843 has led to an extensive theory of linear algebras (or closed systems of hypercomplex numbers) in which the quaternion algebra plays an important rôle. Frobenius [1878, p. 59] proved that the only real linear associative algebras in which a product is zero only when one factor is zero are the real number system, the ordinary complex number system, and the algebra of real quaternions. A much simpler proof has been given by the writer [1914]. Later, the writer [1915] was led to quaternions very naturally by means of the four parameter continuous group which leaves unaltered each line of a set of rulings on the quadric surface
\[ x_1^2 + x_2^2 + x_3^2 + x_4^2 = 0 .\]
The object of the present note is to derive the algebra of quaternions and its direct generalizations without assuming the associative or commutative law. I shall obtain this interesting result by two distinct methods.
@article {key48.0125.02j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Quaternions and their generalizations},
JOURNAL = {Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.},
FJOURNAL = {Proceedings of the National Academy
of Sciences of the United States of
America},
VOLUME = {7},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1921},
PAGES = {109--114},
DOI = {10.1073/pnas.7.4.109},
NOTE = {JFM:48.0125.02.},
ISSN = {0027-8424},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“La composition des polynomes ,”
C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris
172
(1921 ),
pp. 636–640 .
JFM
48.0078.03
article
BibTeX
@article {key48.0078.03j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {La composition des polynomes},
JOURNAL = {C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris},
FJOURNAL = {Comptes Rendus Hebdomadaires des S\'eances
de l'Acad\'emie des Sciences, Paris},
VOLUME = {172},
YEAR = {1921},
PAGES = {636--640},
NOTE = {JFM:48.0078.03.},
ISSN = {0001-4036},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Determination of all general homogeneous polynomials expressible as determinants with linear elements ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
22 : 2
(1921 ),
pp. 167–179 .
MR
1501168
JFM
48.0099.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The general quadratic forms in three and four variables can be transformed into \( x_1x_2-x_3^2 \) and \( x_1x_2-x_3x_4 \) , respectively, and hence are expressible as determinants of order \( {}2 \) . Since any binary form of degree \( r \) is a product of \( r \) linear forms, it is expressible as an \( r \) -rowed determinant whose elements outside the main diagonal are all zero.
It was proved geometrically by H. Schröter [1863] and more simply by L. Cremona [1868] that a sufficiently general cubic surface \( f = 0 \) is the locus of the intersections of corresponding planes of three projective bundles of planes:
\[ \kappa l_{i1} + \lambda l_{i2} + \mu l_{i3} = 0 \qquad (i=1,2,3),\]
where \( \kappa \) , \( \lambda \) , \( \mu \) are parameters and the \( l_{ij} \) are linear homogeneous functions of \( x_1,\dots, \) \( x_4 \) . Hence \( f = 0 \) has the determinantal form \( |l_{ij}| = 0 \) . Taking \( x_4 = 0 \) , we see that a general cubic curve is expressible in determinantal form.
I shall prove that every plane curve is expressible in determinantal form and that, aside from the cases mentioned above, no further general homogeneous polynomial is expressible in determinantal form.
@article {key1501168m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Determination of all general homogeneous
polynomials expressible as determinants
with linear elements},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {22},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1921},
PAGES = {167--179},
DOI = {10.2307/1989015},
NOTE = {MR:1501168. JFM:48.0099.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Rational triangles and quadrilaterals ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
28 : 6–7
(June–July 1921 ),
pp. 244–250 .
MR
1519790
JFM
48.0667.04
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The chief object of this paper is to make a material simplification in Kummer’s classic investigation of rational quadrilaterals. Incidentally it is shown that every rational triangle may be formed by juxtaposing two rational right triangles, so that it suffices to know Diophantus’s complete solution of \( x^2 + y^2 = z^2 \) in rational numbers. From the latter will be deduced all solutions in integers, a problem usually treated independently of the former problem of the rational solutions. For most equations the two problems are essentially distinct.
@article {key1519790m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Rational triangles and quadrilaterals},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {28},
NUMBER = {6--7},
MONTH = {June--July},
YEAR = {1921},
PAGES = {244--250},
DOI = {10.2307/2973328},
NOTE = {MR:1519790. JFM:48.0667.04.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
CODEN = {AMMYAE},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Some relations between the theory of numbers and other branches of mathematics ,”
pp. 41–56
in
Comptes rendus du Congrès International des Mathématiciens, 1920
(Strasbourg, 22–30 September, 1920 ).
Edited by H. Villat .
Édouard Privat (Toulouse ),
1921 .
JFM
48.1151.01
incollection
Abstract
People
BibTeX
I have chosen the subject of my address before the Congress from the field of the theory of numbers, the literature of which 1 had been examining minutely in the preparation and publication of the first two volumes of my History of the Theory of Numbers [1919, 1920]. I shall approach a few typical problems of the theory of numbers through the medium of other branches of mathematics.
@incollection {key48.1151.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Some relations between the theory of
numbers and other branches of mathematics},
BOOKTITLE = {Comptes rendus du {C}ongr\`es {I}nternational
des {M}ath\'ematiciens, 1920},
EDITOR = {Villat, Henri},
PUBLISHER = {\'Edouard Privat},
ADDRESS = {Toulouse},
YEAR = {1921},
PAGES = {41--56},
URL = {http://ada00.math.uni-bielefeld.de/ICM/ICM1920/Main/icm1920.0041.0056.ocr.pdf},
NOTE = {(Strasbourg, 22--30 September, 1920).
JFM:48.1151.01.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A new method in Diophantine analysis ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
27 : 8
(1921 ),
pp. 353–365 .
MR
1560438
JFM
48.0137.04
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In the preceding number of this Bulletin (p. 312) I gave reasons why due caution should be observed toward the literature on the solution of homogeneous equations in integers. The valid knowledge concerning this subject is much less than has been usually admitted. The lack of general methods is even greater than in the subject of non-homogeneous equations. The chief aim of the present paper is to suggest such a method, based on the theory of ideals. The method is applicable in simple cases (§§2–4) without introducing ideals.
For the sake of brevity we shall restrict attention to the problem of finding all integral solutions of the equation
\[ x_1^2 + ax_2^2 + bx_3^2 = x_4^2, \]
an equation admitted [Carmichael 1915, p. 38] to be difficult of treatment by any known methods, and previously solved completely in integers only in the single case \( a = b = 1 \) .
@article {key1560438m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A new method in {D}iophantine analysis},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {27},
NUMBER = {8},
YEAR = {1921},
PAGES = {353--365},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1921-03430-6},
NOTE = {MR:1560438. JFM:48.0137.04.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A fundamental system of covariants of the ternary cubic form ,”
Ann. Math. (2)
23 : 1
(Sepbember 1921 ),
pp. 78–82 .
MR
1502598
JFM
48.0099.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In many different mathematical investigations use is made of covariants of the ternary cubic form \( F \) . Less frequent use is made of the further concomitants involving line coördinates, and these will not be discussed here. The complete system of the \( {}34 \) concomitants was obtained by symbolic methods by Clebsch and Gordan [1873] and simpler by Gundelfinger [1871]. They were exhibited in non-symbolic form by Cayley [1881] for the canonical form
\[ \sum a_i x_i^3 + 6lx_1x_2x_3 .\]
Certain concomitants are obtained in the texts by Salmon, Elliott, and Weber, but no attempt is made to find a fundamental system.
The object of the present paper is to prove by an elementary method that fundamental system of covariants of \( F \) is given by \( F \) , two invariants \( S \) and \( T \) , the Hessian \( H \) of \( F \) , the bordered Hessian determinant \( G \) , and the Jacobian \( J \) of \( F \) , \( H \) , \( G \) :
\begin{gather*} 6^3H = \begin{vmatrix} F_{11} & F_{12} & F_{13} \\ F_{21} & F_{22} & F_{23} \\ F_{31} & F_{32} & F_{33} \end{vmatrix} \\ 6^2G = \begin{vmatrix} F_{11} & F_{12} & F_{13} & H_1 \\ F_{21} & F_{22} & F_{23} & H_2 \\ F_{31} & F_{32} & F_{33} & H_3 \\ H_1 & H_2 & H_3 & 0 \end{vmatrix} \\ 9J = \begin{vmatrix} F_1 & H_1 & G_1 \\ F_2 & H_2 & G_2 \\ F_3 & H_3 & G_3 \end{vmatrix} \end{gather*}
where \( F_{ij} \) denotes \( \partial^2 F/\partial x_i\partial x_j \) and \( H_i \) denotes \( \partial H/\partial x_i \) . The method enables us to compute anew the expressions for \( S \) and \( T \) , and to deduce the syzygy between them and the covariants.
@article {key1502598m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A fundamental system of covariants of
the ternary cubic form},
JOURNAL = {Ann. Math. (2)},
FJOURNAL = {Annals of Mathematics. Second Series},
VOLUME = {23},
NUMBER = {1},
MONTH = {Sepbember},
YEAR = {1921},
PAGES = {78--82},
DOI = {10.2307/1967787},
NOTE = {MR:1502598. JFM:48.0099.03.},
ISSN = {0003-486X},
CODEN = {ANMAAH},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Algebraic theory of the expressibility of cubic forms as determinants, with application to Diophantine analysis ,”
Amer. J. Math.
43 : 2
(April 1921 ),
pp. 102–125 .
MR
1506433
JFM
48.0100.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
It was proved geometrically by H. Schröter [1863] and more simply by L. Cremona [1868, p. 79] that a sufficiently general cubic surface \( f = 0 \) is the locus of the intersections of corresponding planes of three projective bundles of planes:
\begin{align*} \kappa l_{11} + \lambda l_{12} + \mu l_{13} &= 0,\\ \kappa l_{21} + \lambda l_{22} + \mu l_{23} &= 0,\\ \kappa l_{31} + \lambda l_{32} + \mu l_{33} &= 0, \end{align*}
where \( \kappa \) , \( \lambda \) , \( \mu \) are parameters and the \( l_{ij} \) are linear homogeneous functions of \( x_1,\dots, \) \( x_4 \) . Hence the surface is expressible in determinantal form \( |l_{ij}| = 0 \) .
With the application to Diophantine analysis in mind, I here discuss algebraically the problem to express a given cubic form \( f \) as a determinant \( |l_{ij}| \) of the third order.
@article {key1506433m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Algebraic theory of the expressibility
of cubic forms as determinants, with
application to {D}iophantine analysis},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {43},
NUMBER = {2},
MONTH = {April},
YEAR = {1921},
PAGES = {102--125},
DOI = {10.2307/2370244},
NOTE = {MR:1506433. JFM:48.0100.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
A first course in the theory of equations .
J. Wiley & Sons (New York ),
1922 .
Republished in 1939 .
JFM
48.0091.05
book
BibTeX
@book {key48.0091.05j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A first course in the theory of equations},
PUBLISHER = {J. Wiley \& Sons},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1922},
PAGES = {vi+168},
NOTE = {Republished in 1939. JFM:48.0091.05.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Impossibility of restoring unique factorization in a hypercomplex arithmetic ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
28 : 9
(1922 ),
pp. 438–442 .
MR
1560614
JFM
48.0125.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Most numbers \( a + be \) , where \( a \) and \( b \) are integers and \( e^2 = 0 \) , admit of several factorizations into indecomposable numbers. It is proved in §3 that we cannot restore unique factorization by defining hypercomplex ideals analogous to algebraic ideals, nor (§4) by the introduction of any sort of ideals obeying the laws of arithmetic. L. G. du Pasquier [1909; 1915; 1918; 1921] has made statements, omitting proofs, concerning the failure of unique factorization after introducing ideals, apparently meaning those analogous to algebraic ideals.
@article {key1560614m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Impossibility of restoring unique factorization
in a hypercomplex arithmetic},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {28},
NUMBER = {9},
YEAR = {1922},
PAGES = {438--442},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1922-03601-4},
NOTE = {MR:1560614. JFM:48.0125.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
Plane trigonometry with practical applications .
B. H. Sanborn & Co. (Chicago ),
1922 .
Republished in 1970 .
JFM
48.0672.13
book
BibTeX
@book {key48.0672.13j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Plane trigonometry with practical applications},
PUBLISHER = {B. H. Sanborn \& Co.},
ADDRESS = {Chicago},
YEAR = {1922},
PAGES = {xii+211},
NOTE = {Republished in 1970. JFM:48.0672.13.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Integral solutions of \( x^2-my^2=zw \) ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
29 : 10
(1923 ),
pp. 464–467 .
MR
1560793
JFM
49.0096.04
article
BibTeX
@article {key1560793m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Integral solutions of \$x^2-my^2=zw\$},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {29},
NUMBER = {10},
YEAR = {1923},
PAGES = {464--467},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1923-03794-4},
NOTE = {MR:1560793. JFM:49.0096.04.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Should book reviews be censored? ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
30 : 5
(1923 ),
pp. 252–255 .
MR
1520244
article
BibTeX
@article {key1520244m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Should book reviews be censored?},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {30},
NUMBER = {5},
YEAR = {1923},
PAGES = {252--255},
DOI = {10.2307/2299090},
NOTE = {MR:1520244.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
CODEN = {AMMYAE},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The rational linear algebras of maximum and minimum ranks ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
29 : 3
(1923 ),
pp. 120–121 .
Abstract only.
Abstract for article published in Proc. London Math. Soc. 22 :1 (1923) .
Available open access
here .
JFM
49.0088.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The investigation relates to linear associate algebras with a principal unit, the coordinates of whose numbers range over an arbitrary field \( F \) . Such an algebra in \( n \) units of rank \( n \) is irreducible with respect to \( F \) if and only if \( f(x) \) is a power of a polynomial irreducible in \( F \) , where \( f(x) = 0 \) is the rank equation. An algebra over \( F \) , of rank \( {}2 \) , has units \( {}1 \) , \( e_i,\dots, \) \( e_m \) such that
\begin{align*} e_i^2 = c_i,\\ e_ie_j = -e_je_i \quad(i\neq j), \end{align*}
where \( c_i \) belongs to \( F \) . If at least two \( c_i \) are not zero, then \( m = 3 \) and the algebra is the rational generalization of quaternions. If \( c_i = 0 \) (\( i < m \) ), \( c_m\neq 0 \) , the algebra is equivalent either to
\begin{align*} & e_m^2 = 1,\\ & e_m e_i = e_i &&(i\leq k),\\ & e_m e_j = -e_j &&(k < j < m),\\ & e_r e_s = 0 &&(r < m, s < m), \end{align*}
where \( {}2k \geq m - 1 \) , or to
\begin{align*} & e_m e_{2i-1} = e_{2i},\\ & e_m e_{2i} = c_me_{2i-1} &&(i\leq r),\\ & e_j e_k = 0 &&(j < m, k < m), \end{align*}
with \( m = 2r + 1 \) , and \( c_m \) not a square in \( F \) . Finally, if every \( c_i = 0 \) , the square of every number of the algebra is zero (a case of the outstanding problem of nilpotent algebras), and the rather numerous algebras in fewer than eight units are found. These results are applied to the determination of all algebras over any field \( F \) in \( {}2 \) , \( {}3 \) or \( {}4 \) units.
@article {key49.0088.03j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The rational linear algebras of maximum
and minimum ranks},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {29},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1923},
PAGES = {120--121},
NOTE = {Abstract only. Abstract for article
published in \textit{Proc. London Math.
Soc.} \textbf{22}:1 (1923). Available
open access at http://www.ams.org/journals/bull/1923-29-03/S0002-9904-1923-03671-9/S0002-9904-1923-03671-9.pdf.
JFM:49.0088.03.},
ISSN = {0273-0979},
}
L. E. Dickson, H. H. Mitchell, H. S. Vandiver, and G. E. Wahlin :
Algebraic numbers: Report of the committee on algebraic numbers .
Bulletin of the National Research Council 28 .
National Research Council (Washington DC ),
1923 .
Republished (in expanded form) as Algebraic numbers (1967) .
JFM
49.0109.01
book
People
BibTeX
@book {key49.0109.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E. and Mitchell, H. H. and
Vandiver, H. S. and Wahlin, G. E.},
TITLE = {Algebraic numbers: {R}eport of the committee
on algebraic numbers},
SERIES = {Bulletin of the National Research Council},
NUMBER = {28},
PUBLISHER = {National Research Council},
ADDRESS = {Washington DC},
YEAR = {1923},
PAGES = {96},
NOTE = {Republished (in expanded form) as \textit{Algebraic
numbers} (1967). JFM:49.0109.01.},
ISSN = {0096-5227},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A new simple theory of hypercomplex integers ,”
J. Math. Pure Appl.
2 : 9
(1923 ),
pp. 281–326 .
An abstract was published in Bull. Am. Math. Soc. 29 :3 (1923) .
JFM
49.0089.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The definition of a system of hypercomplex integers due to A. Hurwitz and applied to all classic algebras in \( {}2 \) , \( {}3 \) and \( {}4 \) units by Du Pasquier postulates rational coordinates, a finite arithmetical basis, closure under addition, subtraction and multiplication, the presence of the \( n \) basal units \( e_0 = 1,\dots, \) \( e_n \) (or only of \( e_0 \) ), and that the system is a maximal. Unfortunately, no maximal system exists for the majority of algebras. If we employ any non-maximal system, it usually happens that factorization into primes is not unique and cannot be made unique by the introduction of ideals of any kind. These essential difficulties all disappear if we replace the postulate of a finite basis by the assumption that, for every number of the system of integers, the coefficients of the rank equation are all rational integers.
@article {key49.0089.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A new simple theory of hypercomplex
integers},
JOURNAL = {J. Math. Pure Appl.},
FJOURNAL = {Journal de Math\'ematiques Pures et
Appliqu\'ees},
VOLUME = {2},
NUMBER = {9},
YEAR = {1923},
PAGES = {281--326},
NOTE = {An abstract was published in \text{Bull.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{29}:3 (1923).
JFM:49.0089.01.},
ISSN = {0021-7824},
}
L. E. Dickson :
Algebras and their arithmetics .
University of Chicago Press ,
1923 .
Republished in 1938 and 1960 . German translation published as Algebren und ihre Zahlentheorie (1927) .
JFM
49.0079.01
book
BibTeX
@book {key49.0079.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Algebras and their arithmetics},
PUBLISHER = {University of Chicago Press},
YEAR = {1923},
PAGES = {xii+241},
NOTE = {Republished in 1938 and 1960. German
translation published as \textit{Algebren
und ihre Zahlentheorie} (1927). JFM:49.0079.01.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
History of the theory of numbers ,
vol. III: Quadratic and higher forms .
Carnegie Institution (Washington, DC ),
1923 .
With a chapter on the class number by G. H. Cresse.
See also Volume I and Volume II . Chelsea reprinted in 1966 . The whole series was republished in 1934 .
JFM
49.0100.12
book
People
BibTeX
@book {key49.0100.12j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {History of the theory of numbers},
VOLUME = {III: Quadratic and higher forms},
PUBLISHER = {Carnegie Institution},
ADDRESS = {Washington, DC},
YEAR = {1923},
PAGES = {iv+313},
NOTE = {With a chapter on the class number by
G.~H. Cresse. See also Volume I and
Volume II. Chelsea reprinted in 1966.
The whole series was republished in
1934. JFM:49.0100.12.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A new simple theory of hypercomplex integers ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
29 : 3
(1923 ),
pp. 121 .
Abstract of article published in J. Math. Pure Appl. 2 :9 (1923) .
Available open access
here .
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The definition of a system of hypercomplex integers due to A. Hurwitz and applied to all classic algebras in \( {}2 \) , \( {}3 \) and \( {}4 \) units by Du Pasquier postulates rational coordinates, a finite arithmetical basis, closure under addition, subtraction and multiplication, the presence of the \( n \) basal units \( e_0 = 1,\dots, \) \( e_n \) (or only of \( e_0 \) ), and that the system is a maximal. Unfortunately, no maximal system exists for the majority of algebras. If we employ any non-maximal system, it usually happens that factorization into primes is not unique and cannot be made unique by the introduction of ideals of any kind. These essential difficulties all disappear if we replace the postulate of a finite basis by the assumption that, for every number of the system of integers, the coefficients of the rank equation are all rational integers.
@article {key33914004,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A new simple theory of hypercomplex
integers},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {29},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1923},
PAGES = {121},
NOTE = {Abstract of article published in \text{J.
Math. Pure Appl.} \textbf{2}:9 (1923).
. Available open access at http://www.ams.org/journals/bull/1923-29-03/S0002-9904-1923-03676-8/S0002-9904-1923-03676-8.pdf.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Algebras and their arithmetics ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
30 : 5–6
(1924 ),
pp. 247–257 .
MR
1560885
JFM
50.0631.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
@article {key1560885m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Algebras and their arithmetics},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {30},
NUMBER = {5--6},
YEAR = {1924},
PAGES = {247--257},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1924-03895-6},
NOTE = {MR:1560885. JFM:50.0631.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Quadratic fields in which factorization is always unique ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
30 : 7
(1924 ),
pp. 328–334 .
MR
1560910
JFM
50.0113.03
article
BibTeX
@article {key1560910m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Quadratic fields in which factorization
is always unique},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {30},
NUMBER = {7},
YEAR = {1924},
PAGES = {328--334},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1924-03892-0},
NOTE = {MR:1560910. JFM:50.0113.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the theory of numbers and generalized quaternions ,”
Amer. J. Math.
46 : 1
(1924 ),
pp. 1–16 .
An abstract was published in Bull. Am. Math. Soc. 30 :5 (1924) .
MR
1506514
JFM
50.0094.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
This paper presents new results and new methods concerning Diophantine equations, representation of integers by quaternary quadratic forms, and the theory of arithmetics of linear algebras. At the outset is given a simple new proof by the method of descent of Bachet’s theorem that every positive integer is a sum of four integral squares. We next prove the generalization that the roots of the four squares may be chosen to satisfy four assigned linear congruences. The previous generalizations of Bachet’s theorem relate to assigned values of the sum of the four roots.
@article {key1506514m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On the theory of numbers and generalized
quaternions},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {46},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1924},
PAGES = {1--16},
DOI = {10.2307/2370658},
NOTE = {An abstract was published in \textit{Bull.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{30}:5 (1924).
MR:1506514. JFM:50.0094.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Vorlesungen über die Theorie der Algebraischen Zahlen ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
31 : 1
(January 1924 ),
pp. 45–46 .
Book by E. Hecke (Akad. Verlagsges, 1923).
MR
1520346
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1520346m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {V}orlesungen \"uber die
{T}heorie der {A}lgebraischen {Z}ahlen},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {31},
NUMBER = {1},
MONTH = {January},
YEAR = {1924},
PAGES = {45--46},
DOI = {10.2307/2298874},
NOTE = {Book by E.~Hecke (Akad. Verlagsges,
1923). MR:1520346.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
CODEN = {AMMYAE},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Differential equations from the group standpoint ,”
Ann. Math. (2)
25 : 4
(1924 ),
pp. 287–378 .
MR
1502670
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The various classic devices for the integration of differential equations may be explained simply from a single standpoint — that of infinitesimal transformations leaving the equations invariant. What is still more important than this unification of diverse known methods, infinitesimal transformations furnish us a new tool, likely to succeed when the ordinary methods fail, since they enable us to take into account vital information ignored by the ordinary methods.
Although no previous acquaintance with differential equations is presupposed, the paper is not proposed as a substitute for the usual introductory course, but rather to provide a satisfactory review ab initio and at the same time to present the unifying and effective method based on groups.
@article {key1502670m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Differential equations from the group
standpoint},
JOURNAL = {Ann. Math. (2)},
FJOURNAL = {Annals of Mathematics. Second Series},
VOLUME = {25},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1924},
PAGES = {287--378},
DOI = {10.2307/1967773},
NOTE = {MR:1502670.},
ISSN = {0003-486X},
CODEN = {ANMAAH},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Die Arithmetik der quadratischen Formen, zweite Abteilung ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
30 : 7
(1924 ),
pp. 373 .
Book by P. Bachmann (Teubner, 1923).
MR
1560922
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1560922m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {D}ie {A}rithmetik der
quadratischen {F}ormen, zweite {A}bteilung},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {30},
NUMBER = {7},
YEAR = {1924},
PAGES = {373},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1924-03916-0},
NOTE = {Book by P.~Bachmann (Teubner, 1923).
MR:1560922.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On the theory of numbers and generalized quaternions ,”
Bull. Amer. Math. Soc.
30 : 5
(1924 ),
pp. 228 .
Abstract only.
Abstract for Amer. J. Math. 46 :1 .
JFM
50.0095.08
article
Abstract
BibTeX
This paper presents new results and new methods concerning Diophantine equations, representation of integers by quaternary quadratic forms, and the theory of arithmetics of linear algebras. At the outset is given a simple new proof by the method of descent of Bachet’s theorem that every positive integer is a sum of four integral squares. We next prove the generalization that the roots of the four squares may be chosen to satisfy four assigned linear congruences. The previous generalizations of Bachet’s theorem relate to assigned values of the sum of the four roots.
@article {key50.0095.08j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On the theory of numbers and generalized
quaternions},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Amer. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {30},
NUMBER = {5},
YEAR = {1924},
PAGES = {228},
URL = {http://www.ams.org/journals/bull/1924-30-05/S0002-9904-1924-03885-3/S0002-9904-1924-03885-3.pdf},
NOTE = {Abstract only. Abstract for \textit{Amer.
J. Math.} \textbf{46}:1. JFM:50.0095.08.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: History of mathematics ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
32 : 10
(December 1925 ),
pp. 511–512 .
Book by D. E. Smith (Ginn & Co, 1923).
MR
1520803
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1520803m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {H}istory of mathematics},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {32},
NUMBER = {10},
MONTH = {December},
YEAR = {1925},
PAGES = {511--512},
DOI = {10.2307/2299706},
NOTE = {Book by D.~E. {S}mith (Ginn \& Co, 1923).
MR:1520803.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
CODEN = {AMMYAE},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Algèbres nouvelles de division ”
[New division algebras ],
C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris
181
(1925 ),
pp. 836–838 .
See also Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 28 :2 (1926) and Bull. Am. Math. Soc. 34 :5 (1928) .
JFM
51.0121.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key51.0121.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Alg\`ebres nouvelles de division [New
division algebras]},
JOURNAL = {C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris},
FJOURNAL = {Comptes Rendus Hebdomadaires des S\'eances
de l'Acad\'emie des Sciences, Paris},
VOLUME = {181},
YEAR = {1925},
PAGES = {836--838},
NOTE = {See also \textit{Trans. Am. Math. Soc.}
\textbf{28}:2 (1926) and \textit{Bull.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{34}:5 (1928).
JFM:51.0121.01.},
ISSN = {0001-4036},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Lehrbuch der Algebra, verfasst mit Benutzung von Heinrich Webers gleichnamigem Buche ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
31 : 7
(1925 ),
pp. 372–373 .
Book by R. Fricke (Veiweg, 1924).
MR
1561066
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1561066m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {L}ehrbuch der {A}lgebra,
verfasst mit {B}enutzung von {H}einrich
{W}ebers gleichnamigem {B}uche},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {31},
NUMBER = {7},
YEAR = {1925},
PAGES = {372--373},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1925-04067-7},
NOTE = {Book by R.~Fricke (Veiweg, 1924). MR:1561066.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Resolvent sextics of quintic equations ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
31 : 9–10
(1925 ),
pp. 515–523 .
MR
1561108
JFM
51.0093.04
article
Abstract
BibTeX
@article {key1561108m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Resolvent sextics of quintic equations},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {31},
NUMBER = {9--10},
YEAR = {1925},
PAGES = {515--523},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1925-04097-5},
NOTE = {MR:1561108. JFM:51.0093.04.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Quadratic forms which represent all integers ,”
Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the United States of America
12
(December 1926 ),
pp. 756–757 .
JFM
52.0145.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
We shall give generalizations of the classic theorem that every positive integer is a sum of four squares. We seek all sets of positive integers \( a \) , \( b,\dots \) such that every positive integer can be expressed in the form
\[ f = ax^2 + by^2 + \cdots \]
@article {key52.0145.03j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Quadratic forms which represent all
integers},
JOURNAL = {Proceedings of the National Academy
of Sciences of the United States of
America},
VOLUME = {12},
MONTH = {December},
YEAR = {1926},
PAGES = {756--757},
DOI = {10.1073/pnas.12.12.756},
NOTE = {JFM:52.0145.03.},
ISSN = {0027-8424},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“All integral solutions of \( ax^2+bxy+cy^2=w_1 w_2\cdots w_n \) ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
32 : 6
(1926 ),
pp. 644–648 .
An abstract was published in Bull. Am. Math. Soc. 32 :6 (1926) .
MR
1561282
JFM
52.0147.04
article
Abstract
BibTeX
This Diophantine equation (or cases of it) has been treated in two papers by the writer [1921, p. 361; 1923] and two by Professor Wahlin [1924; 1925], all published in this Bulletin . Three of these papers were based on the theory of algebraic ideals. The writer’s paper of 1923 employed an elementary method to find all integral solutions of \( x^2 - my^2 = zw \) . The present paper is elementary and is a sequel to the latter paper.
@article {key1561282m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {All integral solutions of \$ax^2+bxy+cy^2=w_1
w_2\cdots w_n\$},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {32},
NUMBER = {6},
YEAR = {1926},
PAGES = {644--648},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1926-04283-X},
NOTE = {An abstract was published in \textit{Bull.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{32}:6 (1926).
MR:1561282. JFM:52.0147.04.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“New division algebras ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
28 : 2
(1926 ),
pp. 207–234 .
An abstract was published in Bull. Am. Math. Soc. 32 :1 (1926) . See also Bull. Am. Math. Soc. 34 :5 (1928) and C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 181 (1925) .
MR
1501341
JFM
52.0133.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The chief outstanding problem in the theory of linear algebras (or hypercomplex numbers) is the determination of all division algebras. We shall add here very greatly to the present meager knowledge of them, since we shall show how to construct one or more types of division algebras of order \( n^2 \) corresponding to every solvable group of order \( n \) .
@article {key1501341m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {New division algebras},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {28},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1926},
PAGES = {207--234},
DOI = {10.2307/1989112},
NOTE = {An abstract was published in \textit{Bull.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{32}:1 (1926).
See also \textit{Bull. Am. Math. Soc.}
\textbf{34}:5 (1928) and \textit{C.
R. Acad. Sci. Paris} \textbf{181} (1925).
MR:1501341. JFM:52.0133.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
Modern algebraic theories .
B. H. Sanborn & Co. (Chicago ),
1926 .
Republished as Algebraic theories (1959) .
JFM
52.0094.01
book
BibTeX
@book {key52.0094.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard E.},
TITLE = {Modern algebraic theories},
PUBLISHER = {B. H. Sanborn \& Co.},
ADDRESS = {Chicago},
YEAR = {1926},
PAGES = {ix+276},
NOTE = {Republished as \textit{Algebraic theories}
(1959). JFM:52.0094.01.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“All integral solutions of \( ax^2+bxy+cy^2=w_1 w_2\cdots w_n \) ,”
Bull. Amer. Math. Soc.
32 : 6
(1926 ),
pp. 587 .
Abstract only.
JFM
52.0150.16
article
Abstract
BibTeX
This Diophantine equation (or cases of it) has been treated in two papers by the writer [1921, p. 361; 1923] and two by Professor Wahlin [1924; 1925], all published in this Bulletin . Three of these papers were based on the theory of algebraic ideals. The writer’s paper of 1923 employed an elementary method to find all integral solutions of \( x^2 - my^2 = zw \) . The present paper is elementary and is a sequel to the latter paper.
@article {key52.0150.16j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {All integral solutions of \$ax^2+bxy+cy^2=w_1
w_2\cdots w_n\$},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Amer. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {32},
NUMBER = {6},
YEAR = {1926},
PAGES = {587},
URL = {http://www.ams.org/journals/bull/1926-32-06/S0002-9904-1926-04262-2/S0002-9904-1926-04262-2.pdf},
NOTE = {Abstract only. JFM:52.0150.16.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“New division algebras ,”
Bull. Amer. Math. Soc.
32 : 1
(1926 ),
pp. 39 .
Abstract only.
Abstract for article in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 28 :2 (1926) .
JFM
52.0137.12
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The chief outstanding problem in the theory of linear algebras (or hypercomplex numbers) is the determination of all division algebras. We shall add here very greatly to the present meager knowledge of them, since we shall show how to construct one or more types of division algebras of order \( n^2 \) corresponding to every solvable group of order \( n \) .
@article {key52.0137.12j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {New division algebras},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Amer. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {32},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1926},
PAGES = {39},
URL = {http://www.ams.org/journals/bull/1926-32-01/S0002-9904-1926-04157-4/S0002-9904-1926-04157-4.pdf},
NOTE = {Abstract only. Abstract for article
in \textit{Trans. Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{28}:2
(1926). JFM:52.0137.12.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Ternary quadratic forms and congruences ,”
Ann. Math. (2)
28 : 1–4
(1926–1927 ),
pp. 333–341 .
MR
1502786
JFM
53.0133.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
@article {key1502786m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Ternary quadratic forms and congruences},
JOURNAL = {Ann. Math. (2)},
FJOURNAL = {Annals of Mathematics. Second Series},
VOLUME = {28},
NUMBER = {1--4},
YEAR = {1926--1927},
PAGES = {333--341},
DOI = {10.2307/1968378},
NOTE = {MR:1502786. JFM:53.0133.03.},
ISSN = {0003-486X},
CODEN = {ANMAAH},
}
L. E. Dickson :
Algebren und ihre Zahlentheorie
[Algebras and their arithmetics ].
Veröffentlichungen der Schweizerischen Mathematischen Gesellschaft 4 .
Orell Füssli (Zürich ),
1927 .
Translation of completely revised and extended manuscript, with contribution on ideal theory from Andreas Speiser.
German translation of Algebras and their arithmetics (1923) .
JFM
53.0112.01
book
People
BibTeX
@book {key53.0112.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Algebren und ihre {Z}ahlentheorie [Algebras
and their arithmetics]},
SERIES = {Ver\"offentlichungen der Schweizerischen
Mathematischen Gesellschaft},
NUMBER = {4},
PUBLISHER = {Orell F\"ussli},
ADDRESS = {Z\"urich},
YEAR = {1927},
PAGES = {viii+308},
NOTE = {Translation of completely revised and
extended manuscript, with contribution
on ideal theory from Andreas Speiser.
. German translation of \textit{Algebras
and their arithmetics} (1923). JFM:53.0112.01.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Generalizations of Waring’s theorem on fourth, sixth, and eighth powers ,”
Amer. J. Math.
49 : 2
(April 1927 ),
pp. 241–250 .
MR
1506617
JFM
53.0134.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1506617m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Generalizations of {W}aring's theorem
on fourth, sixth, and eighth powers},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {49},
NUMBER = {2},
MONTH = {April},
YEAR = {1927},
PAGES = {241--250},
DOI = {10.2307/2370754},
NOTE = {MR:1506617. JFM:53.0134.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“All positive integers are sums of values of a quadratic function of \( x \) ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
33 : 6
(1927 ),
pp. 713–720 .
MR
1561454
JFM
53.0133.06
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Fermat stated that he was the first to discover the beautiful theorem that every integer \( A\geq 0 \) is a sum of \( m+2 \) polygonal numbers
\[ p_{m+2}(x) = \frac{1}{2}m(x^2 - x) + x \]
of order \( m + 2 \) (or \( m + 2 \) sides), where \( x \) is an integer \( {}\geq 0 \) . The cases \( m = 1 \) and \( m = 2 \) state that every \( A \) is a sum of three triangular numbers
\[ p_3(x) = \frac{1}{2}x(x + 1) ,\]
and also a sum of four squares \( p_4(x) = x^2 \) .
Cauchy [1813] was the first to publish a proof of Fermat’s statement and showed that all but four of the polygonal numbers may be taken to be \( {}0 \) or \( {}1 \) .
In this paper and its sequel we shall give a complete solution of the following more general question.
Problem. Find every quadratic function \( f(x) \) which takes integral values \( {}\geq 0 \) for all integers \( x \geq 0 \) , such that every positive integer \( A \) is a sum of \( l \) of these values, where \( l \) depends on \( f(x) \) , but not on \( A \) .
@article {key1561454m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {All positive integers are sums of values
of a quadratic function of \$x\$},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {33},
NUMBER = {6},
YEAR = {1927},
PAGES = {713--720},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1927-04464-0},
NOTE = {MR:1561454. JFM:53.0133.06.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Quaternary quadratic forms representing all integers ,”
Amer. J. Math.
49 : 1
(January 1927 ),
pp. 39–56 .
An abstract was published in Bull. Am. Math Soc. 33 :2 (1927) .
MR
1506600
JFM
53.0133.05
article
Abstract
BibTeX
For the case in which only squares of the four variables occur, the forms representing all positive integers were determined by Ramanujan [1917]. It is a much more difficult problem to determine the forms which involve also products of the variables whose coefficients may be odd. This paper develops a method of solving this problem completely.
The fact that one of these new forms represents all positive integers is equivalent to the fact that a related form involving only squares shall represent all positive multiples of a fixed integer, such as \( {}4 \) , \( {}8 \) , \( {}12 \) , \( {}28 \) , \( {}44 \) . A very few of the latter facts were known, and their importance has been emphasized in the literature.
The first part of the paper proves the necessary auxiliary theorems on ternary forms. They are useful also in other problems in the theory of numbers.
@article {key1506600m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Quaternary quadratic forms representing
all integers},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {49},
NUMBER = {1},
MONTH = {January},
YEAR = {1927},
PAGES = {39--56},
DOI = {10.2307/2370770},
NOTE = {An abstract was published in \textit{Bull.
Am. Math Soc.} \textbf{33}:2 (1927).
MR:1506600. JFM:53.0133.05.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Extensions of Waring’s theorem on fourth powers ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
33 : 3
(1927 ),
pp. 319–327 .
MR
1561373
JFM
53.0134.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In 1770 Waring conjectured that every positive integer \( p \) is a sum of nineteen integral biquadrates. It is shown in §8 that eight of them may be taken equal if \( p\leq 4100 \) . Again, sixteen of them may be taken equal in pairs if \( p\leq 2400 \) . All possible similar results are included in Theorem 1 of §3.
@article {key1561373m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Extensions of {W}aring's theorem on
fourth powers},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {33},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1927},
PAGES = {319--327},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1927-04365-8},
NOTE = {MR:1561373. JFM:53.0134.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Integers represented by positive ternary quadratic forms ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
33 : 1
(1927 ),
pp. 63–70 .
MR
1561323
JFM
53.0133.04
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Dirichlet [1850] proved by the method of §2 the following two theorems:
\( A=x^2+y^2+z^2 \) represents exclusively all positive integers not of the form \( {}4^k(8n + 7) \) .
\( B = x^2+y^2+3z^2 \) represents every positive integer not divisible by \( {}3 \) .
Without giving any details, he stated that like considerations applied to the representation of multiples of \( {}3 \) by \( B \) . But the latter problem is much more difficult and no treatment has since been published; it is solved below by two methods.
Ramanujan [1917] readily found all sets of positive integers \( a \) , \( b \) , \( c \) , \( d \) such that every positive integer can be expressed in the form
\[ ax^2+by^2+cz^2+du^2 .\]
He made use of the forms of numbers representable by
\begin{align*} A,B,C &= x^2 + y^2 + 2z^2,\\ D &= x^2 + 2y^2 + 2z^2,\\ E &= x^2 + 2y^2 + 3z^2,\\ F &= x^2 + 2y^2 + 4z^2,\\ G &= x^2 + 2y^2 + 5z^2. \end{align*}
He gave no proofs for these forms and doubtless obtained his results empirically. We shall give a complete theory for these forms. These cases indicate clearly methods of procedure for any similar form.
@article {key1561323m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Integers represented by positive ternary
quadratic forms},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {33},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1927},
PAGES = {63--70},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1927-04312-9},
NOTE = {MR:1561323. JFM:53.0133.04.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Extensions of Waring’s theorem on nine cubes ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
34 : 4
(April 1927 ),
pp. 177–183 .
MR
1521139
JFM
53.0134.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In 1770, Waring conjectured that every positive integer \( p \) is the sum of the cubes of nine integers \( {}\geq 0 \) . It will be shown in §2 that three of these cubes may be taken to be equal when \( p < 40,000 \) . Again, six of the cubes may be taken equal in pairs if \( p < 1400 \) (end of §5). These and all possible similar theorems are corollaries to
Every positive integer \( p \) can be represented by
\[ x^3 + y^3 + 2z^3 + 2u^3 +3v^3 \]
with \( x\geq 0,\dots, \) \( v\geq 0 \) .
This is verified in §5 for \( p \leq 1200 \) . It was verified by direct trial for \( {}1200 < p \leq 1400 \) .
@article {key1521139m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Extensions of {W}aring's theorem on
nine cubes},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {34},
NUMBER = {4},
MONTH = {April},
YEAR = {1927},
PAGES = {177--183},
DOI = {10.2307/2299861},
NOTE = {MR:1521139. JFM:53.0134.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
CODEN = {AMMYAE},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A generalization of Waring’s theorem on nine cubes ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
33 : 3
(1927 ),
pp. 299–300 .
MR
1561368
JFM
53.0134.04
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Every positive integer \( p \) can be expressed as a sum of seven cubes and the double of a cube, the cubes being positive or zero integers.
On the basis of known tables, this theorem holds for \( p\leq 40{,}000 \) as shown by the writer in the American Mathematical Monthly for April, 1927. The further empirical theorems of that paper will not be discussed here.
We shall here prove the above theorem for all sufficiently large integers \( p \) . The proof is analogous to that employed by Landau [1909] in proving his theorem that every sufficiently large integer is a sum of at most eight positive integral cubes.
@article {key1561368m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A generalization of {W}aring's theorem
on nine cubes},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {33},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1927},
PAGES = {299--300},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1927-04357-9},
NOTE = {MR:1561368. JFM:53.0134.04.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Singular case of pairs of bilinear, quadratic, or Hermitian forms ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
29 : 2
(1927 ),
pp. 239–253 .
MR
1501387
JFM
53.0101.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The main object of this paper is a treatment of the equivalence of pairs of bilinear forms in the singular case by a purely rational method. The problem was first discussed by Kronecker [1890], who employed the irrational canonical form due to Weierstrass for the auxiliary non-singular case, instead of the rational canonical form employed here. It is then a simple matter to deduce in Parts II and III the criteria for the equivalence of pairs of symmetric or Hermitian bilinear forms, or quadratic or Hermitian forms, in the singular case.
@article {key1501387m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Singular case of pairs of bilinear,
quadratic, or {H}ermitian forms},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {29},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1927},
PAGES = {239--253},
DOI = {10.2307/1989209},
NOTE = {MR:1501387. JFM:53.0101.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Generalizations of the theorem of Fermat and Cauchy on polygonal numbers ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
33 : 6
(1927 ),
pp. 650 .
Abstract only.
Abstract for article in Bull. Am. Math. Soc. 34 :1 (1928) .
Available open access
here .
JFM
53.0141.04
article
Abstract
BibTeX
@article {key53.0141.04j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Generalizations of the theorem of {F}ermat
and {C}auchy on polygonal numbers},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {33},
NUMBER = {6},
YEAR = {1927},
PAGES = {650},
NOTE = {Abstract only. Abstract for article
in \textit{Bull. Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{34}:1
(1928). Available open access at http://www.ams.org/journals/bull/1927-33-06/S0002-9904-1927-04440-8/S0002-9904-1927-04440-8.pdf.
JFM:53.0141.04.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Quaternary quadratic forms representing all integers ,”
Bull. Amer. Math. Soc.
33 : 2
(1927 ),
pp. 161 .
Abstract only.
Abstract for article in Amer. J. Math. 49 :1 (1927) .
JFM
53.0140.14
article
Abstract
BibTeX
For the case in which only squares of the four variables occur, the forms representing all positive integers were determined by Ramanujan [1917]. It is a much more difficult problem to determine the forms which involve also products of the variables whose coefficients may be odd. This paper develops a method of solving this problem completely.
The fact that one of these new forms represents all positive integers is equivalent to the fact that a related form involving only squares shall represent all positive multiples of a fixed integer, such as \( {}4 \) , \( {}8 \) , \( {}12 \) , \( {}28 \) , \( {}44 \) . A very few of the latter facts were known, and their importance has been emphasized in the literature.
The first part of the paper proves the necessary auxiliary theorems on ternary forms. They are useful also in other problems in the theory of numbers.
@article {key53.0140.14j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Quaternary quadratic forms representing
all integers},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Amer. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {33},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1927},
PAGES = {161},
URL = {http://www.ams.org/journals/bull/1927-33-02/S0002-9904-1927-04342-7/S0002-9904-1927-04342-7.pdf},
NOTE = {Abstract only. Abstract for article
in \textit{Amer. J. Math.} \textbf{49}:1
(1927). JFM:53.0140.14.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Simpler proofs of Waring’s theorem on cubes, with various generalizations ,”
Bull. Amer. Math. Soc.
33 : 4
(1927 ),
pp. 389 .
Abstract only.
Abstract for article in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 30 :1 (1928) .
JFM
53.0140.16
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Write \( C_n \) for the sum of the cubes of \( n \) undetermined integers \( {}\geq 0 \) . The following forms represent all positive integers:
\[ tx^3+C_8 \]
for \( {}1 \leq t \leq 23 \) , \( t\neq 20 \) ;
\[ tx^3+2y^3+C_7 \]
for \( {}1\leq t \leq 34 \) , \( t\neq 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 \) ;
\[ tx^3+3y^3+C_7 \]
for \( {}1\leq t\leq 9 \) , \( t\neq 5 \) .
@article {key53.0140.16j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Simpler proofs of {W}aring's theorem
on cubes, with various generalizations},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Amer. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {33},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1927},
PAGES = {389},
URL = {http://www.ams.org/journals/bull/1927-33-04/S0002-9904-1927-04386-5/S0002-9904-1927-04386-5.pdf},
NOTE = {Abstract only. Abstract for article
in \textit{Trans. Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{30}:1
(1928). JFM:53.0140.16.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Quadratic functions of forms, sums of whose values give all positive integers ,”
J. Math. Pure Appl.
7 : 9
(1928 ),
pp. 319–336 .
JFM
54.0177.03
article
BibTeX
@article {key54.0177.03j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Quadratic functions of forms, sums of
whose values give all positive integers},
JOURNAL = {J. Math. Pure Appl.},
FJOURNAL = {Journal de Math\'ematiques Pures et
Appliqu\'ees},
VOLUME = {7},
NUMBER = {9},
YEAR = {1928},
PAGES = {319--336},
NOTE = {JFM:54.0177.03.},
ISSN = {0021-7824},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Algebraic arithmetic ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
34 : 4
(1928 ),
pp. 511–512 .
Book by E. T. Bell (AMS, 1927).
MR
1561596
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1561596m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {A}lgebraic arithmetic},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {34},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1928},
PAGES = {511--512},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1928-04579-2},
NOTE = {Book by E.~T. Bell (AMS, 1927). MR:1561596.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Outline of the theory to date of the arithmetics of algebras ,”
pp. 95–102
in
Proceedings of the International Mathematical Congress, 1924
(Toronto, 11–16 August, 1924 ),
vol. 1 .
Edited by J. C. Fields .
University of Toronto Press ,
1928 .
JFM
54.0160.03
incollection
Abstract
People
BibTeX
Our purpose is to sketch in a broad way the leading features of the origin and development of a new branch of number theory which furnishes a fundamental generalization of the theory of algebraic numbers. Algebraic fields (Körper) are all very special cases of linear associative algebras, briefly called algebras. The integral quantities of any algebra will be so defined that they reduce to the classic integral algebraic numbers in the special case in which the algebra becomes an algebraic field.
@incollection {key54.0160.03j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Outline of the theory to date of the
arithmetics of algebras},
BOOKTITLE = {Proceedings of the {I}nternational {M}athematical
{C}ongress, 1924},
EDITOR = {Fields, J. C.},
VOLUME = {1},
PUBLISHER = {University of Toronto Press},
YEAR = {1928},
PAGES = {95--102},
URL = {http://www.mathunion.org/ICM/ICM1924.1/Main/icm1924.1.0095.0102.ocr.pdf},
NOTE = {(Toronto, 11--16 August, 1924). JFM:54.0160.03.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Further development of the theory of arithmetics of algebras ,”
pp. 173–184
in
Proceedings of the International Mathematical Congress, 1924
(Toronto, 11–16 August, 1924 ),
vol. 1 .
Edited by J. C. Fields .
University of Toronto Press ,
1928 .
JFM
54.0161.01
incollection
Abstract
People
BibTeX
The writer recently [1923] gave a new conception of integral elements of a rational associative algebra \( A \) having a modulus \( {}1 \) , which avoids the serious objections against all earlier conceptions.
This above conception of integral elements may be extended to algebras over an algebraic field (or any field for which the notion of integer is defined). In particular, quaternions over any quadratic field are investigated in §§4–9.
@incollection {key54.0161.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Further development of the theory of
arithmetics of algebras},
BOOKTITLE = {Proceedings of the {I}nternational {M}athematical
{C}ongress, 1924},
EDITOR = {Fields, J. C.},
VOLUME = {1},
PUBLISHER = {University of Toronto Press},
YEAR = {1928},
PAGES = {173--184},
URL = {http://ada00.math.uni-bielefeld.de/ICM/ICM1924.1/Main/icm1924.1.0173.0184.ocr.pdf},
NOTE = {(Toronto, 11--16 August, 1924). JFM:54.0161.01.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Simpler proofs of Waring’s theorem on cubes, with various generalizations ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
30 : 1
(1928 ),
pp. 1–18 .
An abstract was published in Bull. Am. Math. Soc. 33 :4 (1927) .
MR
1501417
JFM
54.0177.04
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Write \( C_n \) for the sum of the cubes of \( n \) undetermined integers \( {}\geq 0 \) . The following forms represent all positive integers:
\[ tx^3+C_8 \]
for \( {}1 \leq t \leq 23 \) , \( t\neq 20 \) ;
\[ tx^3+2y^3+C_7 \]
for \( {}1\leq t \leq 34 \) , \( t\neq 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 \) ;
\[ tx^3+3y^3+C_7 \]
for \( {}1\leq t\leq 9 \) , \( t\neq 5 \) .
@article {key1501417m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Simpler proofs of {W}aring's theorem
on cubes, with various generalizations},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {30},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1928},
PAGES = {1--18},
DOI = {10.2307/1989262},
NOTE = {An abstract was published in \textit{Bull.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{33}:4 (1927).
MR:1501417. JFM:54.0177.04.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Lehrbuch der Algebra, volume II ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
34 : 4
(1928 ),
pp. 531 .
Book by by R. Fricke (Vieweg, 1926).
MR
1561607
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1561607m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {L}ehrbuch der {A}lgebra,
volume {II}},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {34},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1928},
PAGES = {531},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1928-04602-5},
NOTE = {Book by by R.~Fricke (Vieweg, 1926).
MR:1561607.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A new theory of linear transformations and pairs of bilinear forms ,”
pp. 361–363
in
Proceedings of the International Mathematical Congress, 1924
(Toronto, 11–16 August, 1924 ),
vol. 1 .
Edited by J. C. Fields .
University of Toronto Press (Toronto ),
1928 .
JFM
54.0110.06
incollection
Abstract
People
BibTeX
It is customary to develop the theory of pairs of bilinear forms having the matrices \( M \) and \( N \) , and by considering the special case in which \( N \) is the identity (or unit) matrix \( I \) to deduce the theory of the canonical form of a linear transformation \( T \) . We here proceed in reverse order and first develop independently a simple theory of linear transformation and later deduce the theory of equivalence of pairs of matrices and hence of pairs of bilinear forms. We avoid the introduction of irrationalities and employ only rational processes, so that our theory holds for any given field (or domain of rationality). We obtain a simple interpretation of invariant factors.
Moreover, we avoid the consideration of matrices whose elements are any polynomials in a variable \( \lambda \) as well as elementary transformations of matrices.
@incollection {key54.0110.06j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A new theory of linear transformations
and pairs of bilinear forms},
BOOKTITLE = {Proceedings of the {I}nternational {M}athematical
{C}ongress, 1924},
EDITOR = {Fields, J. C.},
VOLUME = {1},
PUBLISHER = {University of Toronto Press},
ADDRESS = {Toronto},
YEAR = {1928},
PAGES = {361--363},
URL = {http://ada00.math.uni-bielefeld.de/ICM/ICM1924.1/Main/icm1924.1.0361.0364.ocr.pdf},
NOTE = {(Toronto, 11--16 August, 1924). JFM:54.0110.06.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“New division algebras ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
34 : 5
(1928 ),
pp. 555–560 .
See also Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 28 :2 (1926) and C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 181 (1925) .
MR
1561617
JFM
54.0161.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
No technical acquaintance with linear algebras is presupposed in this note. We consider only linear algebras for which multiplication is associative. As with quaternions, an algebra \( A \) is called a division algebra if every element \( \neq 0 \) of \( A \) has an inverse in \( A \) . A division algebra \( A \) over a field \( F \) is called normal if the numbers of \( F \) are the only elements of \( A \) which are commutative with every element of \( A \) .
In a paper recently offered to the Transactions of this Society, A. A. Albert determined all normal division algebras of order \( {}16 \) and found a new type. The object of this note is to derive from mild assumptions the corresponding type of normal division algebras \( A \) of order \( {}4p^2 \) , where \( p \) is a prime.
@article {key1561617m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {New division algebras},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {34},
NUMBER = {5},
YEAR = {1928},
PAGES = {555--560},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1928-04620-7},
NOTE = {See also \textit{Trans. Am. Math. Soc.}
\textbf{28}:2 (1926) and \textit{C.
R. Acad. Sci. Paris} \textbf{181} (1925).
MR:1561617. JFM:54.0161.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Generalizations of the theorem of Fermat and Cauchy on polygonal numbers ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
34 : 1
(1928 ),
pp. 63–72 .
An abstract was published in Bull. Am. Math. Soc. 33 :6 (1927) .
MR
1561505
JFM
54.0180.02
article
Abstract
BibTeX
@article {key1561505m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Generalizations of the theorem of {F}ermat
and {C}auchy on polygonal numbers},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {34},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1928},
PAGES = {63--72},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1928-04513-5},
NOTE = {An abstract was published in \textit{Bull.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textit{33}:6 (1927).
MR:1561505. JFM:54.0180.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Extended polygonal numbers ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
34 : 2
(1928 ),
pp. 205–217 .
MR
1561530
JFM
54.0181.01
article
BibTeX
@article {key1561530m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Extended polygonal numbers},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {34},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1928},
PAGES = {205--217},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1928-04514-7},
NOTE = {MR:1561530. JFM:54.0181.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Additive number theory for all quadratic functions ,”
Amer. J. Math.
50 : 1
(January 1928 ),
pp. 1–48 .
MR
1506653
JFM
54.0179.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
We consider only those quadratic functions \( q(x) \) which take integral values \( {}\geq 0 \) for every integer \( x\geq 0 \) .
One statement of our problem is to findthe maximum error committed in affirming that every positive integer \( p \) is a sum of \( s \) such values of \( q(x) \) . Or, if \( m(p) \) denotes the minimum of the differences between \( p \) and all such sums, what is the maximum of \( m(p) \) for all \( p \) ?
@article {key1506653m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Additive number theory for all quadratic
functions},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {50},
NUMBER = {1},
MONTH = {January},
YEAR = {1928},
PAGES = {1--48},
DOI = {10.2307/2370847},
NOTE = {MR:1506653. JFM:54.0179.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The forms \( ax^2+by^2+cz^2 \) which represent all integers ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
35 : 1
(1929 ),
pp. 55–59 .
MR
1561687
JFM
55.0097.04
article
Abstract
BibTeX
\( f=ax^2+by^2+cz^2 \) represents all integers, positive, negative, or zero, if and only if:
\( a \) , \( b \) , \( c \) are not all of like sign and no one is zero;
no two of \( a \) , \( b \) , \( c \) have a common odd prime factor;
either \( a \) , \( b \) , \( c \) are all odd, or two are odd and one is double an odd;
\( -bc \) , \( -ac \) , \( -ab \) are quadratic residues of \( a \) , \( b \) , \( c \) , respectively.
@article {key1561687m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The forms \$ax^2+by^2+cz^2\$ which represent
all integers},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {35},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1929},
PAGES = {55--59},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1929-04692-5},
NOTE = {MR:1561687. JFM:55.0097.04.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Universal quadratic forms ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
31 : 1
(1929 ),
pp. 164–189 .
MR
1501474
JFM
55.0098.01
article
Abstract
BibTeX
@article {key1501474m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Universal quadratic forms},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {31},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1929},
PAGES = {164--189},
DOI = {10.2307/1989404},
NOTE = {MR:1501474. JFM:55.0098.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
Introduction to the theory of numbers .
University of Chicago Press ,
1929 .
German translation published as Einführung in die Zahlentheorie (1931) .
JFM
55.0092.19
book
BibTeX
@book {key55.0092.19j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Introduction to the theory of numbers},
PUBLISHER = {University of Chicago Press},
YEAR = {1929},
PAGES = {viii+183},
NOTE = {German translation published as \textit{Einf\"uhrung
in die Zahlentheorie} (1931). JFM:55.0092.19.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Construction of division algebras ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
32 : 2
(1930 ),
pp. 319–334 .
An abstract was published in Bull. Am. Math. Soc. 36 :3 (1930) .
MR
1501540
JFM
56.0868.03
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The main outstanding problem in the theory of linear associative algebras is the determination of all division algebras. We shall make a noteworthy simplification of the theory of the construction of a type of algebras \( \Gamma \) which includes all known division algebras. The simplification is so great that it would require a hundred pages to obtain our results by the best earlier method.
The paper gives an elementary exposition from first principles of the simplified construction of algebras \( \Gamma \) It can be easily read by those familiar with the concept of real quaternions with the basis \( {}1 \) , \( i \) , \( j \) , \( k=ij \) , complex quaternions, and, in general, quaternions over any field \( F \) . The few further terms used will be defined. The paper is independent of earlier literature except that, after proving a result for \( {}3 \) -rowed matrices, we give references to the similar proof for \( p \) -rowed matrices.
@article {key1501540m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Construction of division algebras},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {32},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1930},
PAGES = {319--334},
DOI = {10.2307/1989497},
NOTE = {An abstract was published in \textit{Bull.
Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{36}:3 (1930).
MR:1501540. JFM:56.0868.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Book review: Lehrbuch der Algebra, volume III: Algebraische Zahlen ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
36 : 1
(1930 ),
pp. 31 .
Book by R. Fricke (Vieweg, 1928).
MR
1561872
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key1561872m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Book review: {L}ehrbuch der {A}lgebra,
volume {III}: {A}lgebraische {Z}ahlen},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {36},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1930},
PAGES = {31},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1930-04868-5},
NOTE = {Book by R.~Fricke (Vieweg, 1928). MR:1561872.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
Studies in the theory of numbers .
Science Series 21 .
University of Chicago Press ,
1930 .
JFM
56.0154.01
book
BibTeX
@book {key56.0154.01j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Studies in the theory of numbers},
SERIES = {Science Series},
NUMBER = {21},
PUBLISHER = {University of Chicago Press},
YEAR = {1930},
PAGES = {x+230},
NOTE = {JFM:56.0154.01.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Construction of division algebras ,”
Bull. Amer. Math. Soc.
36 : 3
(1930 ),
pp. 217–218 .
Abstract only.
Abstract for article in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 32 :2 (1930) .
JFM
56.0152.09
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The main outstanding problem in the theory of linear associative algebras is the determination of all division algebras. We shall make a noteworthy simplification of the theory of the construction of a type of algebras \( \Gamma \) which includes all known division algebras. The simplification is so great that it would require a hundred pages to obtain our results by the best earlier method.
The paper gives an elementary exposition from first principles of the simplified construction of algebras \( \Gamma \) It can be easily read by those familiar with the concept of real quaternions with the basis \( {}1 \) , \( i \) , \( j \) , \( k=ij \) , complex quaternions, and, in general, quaternions over any field \( F \) . The few further terms used will be defined. The paper is independent of earlier literature except that, after proving a result for \( {}3 \) -rowed matrices, we give references to the similar proof for \( p \) -rowed matrices.
@article {key56.0152.09j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Construction of division algebras},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Amer. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {36},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1930},
PAGES = {217--218},
URL = {http://www.ams.org/journals/bull/1930-36-03/S0002-9904-1930-04929-0/S0002-9904-1930-04929-0.pdf},
NOTE = {Abstract only. Abstract for article
in \textit{Trans. Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{32}:2
(1930). JFM:56.0152.09.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Proof of a Waring theorem on fifth powers ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
37 : 8
(1931 ),
pp. 549–553 .
MR
1562194
JFM
57.0196.02
Zbl
0002.24701
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In 1770, E. Waring conjectured that “every number is a sum of nine cubes, also is a sum of \( {}19 \) fourth powers, and so on to infinity.”
By elaborate and very delicate analysis, Hardy and Littlewood obtained remarkable asymptotic results. Their proofs apply only to numbers exceeding an extremely large limit \( L \) .
I shall here explain my method to cover the numbers \( {} < L \) and hence finally obtain universal theorems holding from \( {}1 \) to infinity.
@article {key1562194m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Proof of a {W}aring theorem on fifth
powers},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {37},
NUMBER = {8},
YEAR = {1931},
PAGES = {549--553},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1931-05198-3},
NOTE = {MR:1562194. Zbl:0002.24701. JFM:57.0196.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
Einführung in die Zahlentheorie .
Teubner (Leipzig and Berlin ),
1931 .
German translation of Introduction to the theory of numbers (1929) .
Zbl
0002.01103
book
BibTeX
@book {key0002.01103z,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Einf\"uhrung in die {Z}ahlentheorie},
PUBLISHER = {Teubner},
ADDRESS = {Leipzig and Berlin},
YEAR = {1931},
PAGES = {viii+175},
NOTE = {German translation of \textit{Introduction
to the theory of numbers} (1929). Zbl:0002.01103.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Minimum decompositions into \( n \) -th powers ,”
Amer. J. Math.
55 : 1–4
(1933 ),
pp. 593–602 .
MR
1506986
Zbl
0008.00405
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Let \( a = 2^n \) , \( b=3^n \) . Consider all the decomposition \( x + ya + zb \) of a given integer \( i \) in which \( x, y, z \) are integers \( {}\geq 0 \) . The case in which \( x + y + z \) is the minimum yields the minimum decomposition. We shall find the minimum decompositions of all integers \( i \) .
All decompositions of all integers may be exhibited in a highly condensed table whose successive columns involve the successive multiples of \( b \) . Down to a certain point every column has a minimum decomposition, while after that point no column has a minimum decomposition. This point of division is a complicated function of \( n \) which is by no means monotonic. This function is evaluated for \( n\leq 36 \) , a limit beyond the needs of applications to Waring’s problem. Except for this point, the theory is developed for a general \( n \) and is remarkably simple.
@article {key1506986m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Minimum decompositions into \$n\$-th powers},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {55},
NUMBER = {1--4},
YEAR = {1933},
PAGES = {593--602},
DOI = {10.2307/2371152},
NOTE = {MR:1506986. Zbl:0008.00405.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Recent progress on Waring’s theorem and its generalizations ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
39 : 10
(1933 ),
pp. 701–727 .
MR
1562720
JFM
59.0177.01
Zbl
0008.00501
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The simplest theorem in question states that every positive integer is a sum of four integral squares. This is an example of a universal Waring theorem. The elaborate theory due to Hardy and Littlewood yields a number \( C(s,n) \) beyond which every integer is a sum of \( s \) integral \( n \) -th powers greater than or equal to zero. Since \( C \) is excessively large, their theory yields essentially only asymptotic theorems.
For several years the writer has been elaborating his idea that it is possible to supplement these asymptotic theorems and show that they hold also for all integers below \( C \) . The resulting new universal theorems are here first published.
The various aspects of Waring’s problem may be compared with those of the theory of functions of a complex variable. Such a function may be studied in the neighborhood of infinity (corresponding to asymptotic Waring theorems), or in the neighborhood of the origin (compare our new results in §2), or over the whole plane (corresponding to universal Waring theorems). Analytic continuation of a function has its analog in our extension of a range for which \( s \) \( n \) -th powers suffice to a larger range for which also \( s \) \( n \) -th powers suffice. Such an extension is different from ascent to a still larger range for which \( s+1 \) \( n \) -th powers suffice (§3).
@article {key1562720m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Recent progress on {W}aring's theorem
and its generalizations},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {39},
NUMBER = {10},
YEAR = {1933},
PAGES = {701--727},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1933-05719-1},
NOTE = {MR:1562720. Zbl:0008.00501. JFM:59.0177.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
Minimum decompositions into fifth powers .
Mathematical Tables, British Association for the Advancement of Science 3 .
Cambridge University Press ,
1933 .
JFM
59.0545.04
Zbl
0008.00404
book
BibTeX
@book {key0008.00404z,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Minimum decompositions into fifth powers},
SERIES = {Mathematical Tables, British Association
for the Advancement of Science},
NUMBER = {3},
PUBLISHER = {Cambridge University Press},
YEAR = {1933},
PAGES = {vi+368},
NOTE = {Zbl:0008.00404. JFM:59.0545.04.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Eliakim Hastings Moore ,”
Science
77 : 1986
(January 1933 ),
pp. 79–80 .
JFM
59.0854.08
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key59.0854.08j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Eliakim {H}astings {M}oore},
JOURNAL = {Science},
VOLUME = {77},
NUMBER = {1986},
MONTH = {January},
YEAR = {1933},
PAGES = {79--80},
DOI = {10.1126/science.77.1986.79},
NOTE = {JFM:59.0854.08.},
ISSN = {0036-8075},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A new method for universal Waring theorems with details for seventh powers ,”
Amer. Math. Mon.
41 : 9
(November 1934 ),
pp. 547–555 .
MR
1523212
JFM
60.0942.03
Zbl
0010.29405
article
BibTeX
@article {key1523212m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A new method for universal {W}aring
theorems with details for seventh powers},
JOURNAL = {Amer. Math. Mon.},
FJOURNAL = {The American Mathematical Monthly},
VOLUME = {41},
NUMBER = {9},
MONTH = {November},
YEAR = {1934},
PAGES = {547--555},
DOI = {10.2307/2301430},
NOTE = {MR:1523212. Zbl:0010.29405. JFM:60.0942.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9890},
CODEN = {AMMYAE},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The converse of Waring’s problem ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
40 : 10
(1934 ),
pp. 711–714 .
MR
1562959
JFM
60.0943.01
Zbl
0010.10305
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In the most general Waring problem we are given a set of integers \( {}\geq 0 \) and seek \( k \) such that every integer (or every sufficiently large integer) is a sum of \( k \) numbers of the set. We then call the set a \( k \) -set. In the converse problem, \( k \) is given and we seek all \( k \) -sets.
@article {key1562959m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The converse of {W}aring's problem},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {40},
NUMBER = {10},
YEAR = {1934},
PAGES = {711--714},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1934-05951-2},
NOTE = {MR:1562959. Zbl:0010.10305. JFM:60.0943.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Two-fold generalizations of Cauchy’s lemma ,”
Amer. J. Math.
56 : 1–4
(1934 ),
pp. 513–528 .
MR
1507040
JFM
60.0120.02
Zbl
0010.05404
article
Abstract
BibTeX
We investigate the conditions on \( a \) and \( b \) under which there exist integral solutions \( {} > -k \) of the pair of equations
\begin{align*} a &= \sum_{i=1}^s c_ix_i^2,\\ b &= \sum_{i=1}^8 c_ix_i, \end{align*}
where \( k \) is an integer, while each \( c_i \) is a given positive integer.
@article {key1507040m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Two-fold generalizations of {C}auchy's
lemma},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {56},
NUMBER = {1--4},
YEAR = {1934},
PAGES = {513--528},
DOI = {10.2307/2370952},
NOTE = {MR:1507040. Zbl:0010.05404. JFM:60.0120.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Waring’s problem for cubic functions ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
36 : 1
(January 1934 ),
pp. 1–12 .
MR
1501731
JFM
60.0137.03
Zbl
0008.29702
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In 1921 it was proved by Kamke that if \( f(x) \) is a polynomial with rational coefficients whose value is an integer \( {}\geq 0 \) for every integer \( x\geq 0 \) , then every integer \( {}\geq 0 \) is a sum of a limited number \( u \) of \( {}1 \) ’s adn a limited number \( v \) of values of \( f(x) \) for integers \( x\geq 0 \) . This existence theorem was later proved by the method of Hardy and Littlewood by Winogradow and Landau.
For the case of any quadratic function, the writer (and later Dr. Pall) evaluated the limits \( u \) and \( V \) .
We shall here treat cubic functions
\[ f(x)=\frac{\alpha x^3+\beta x}{d}\quad(\alpha\neq0,d > 0), \]
\( \alpha \) , \( \beta \) , \( d \) integers without a common factor \( {} > 1 \) . The case in which a term \( x^2 \) occurs is under investigation by my students. The main result is Theorem 2. For special cubic functions, Theorems 4 and 5 give universal Waring theorems.
@article {key1501731m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Waring's problem for cubic functions},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {36},
NUMBER = {1},
MONTH = {January},
YEAR = {1934},
PAGES = {1--12},
DOI = {10.2307/1989704},
NOTE = {MR:1501731. Zbl:0008.29702. JFM:60.0137.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Universal Waring theorem for eleventh powers ,”
J. London Math. Soc.
9 : 3
(1934 ),
pp. 201–206 .
MR
1574183
JFM
60.0140.02
Zbl
0009.29904
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The object of this paper is to prove
Every positive integer is a sum of \( {}4425 \) integral eleventh powers greater than or equal to \( {}0 \) .
The best asymptotic result by Hardy and Littlewood is \( {}4687 \) . My limit for a universal theorem is, therefore, better than their limit for an asymptotic one. If \( C \) is the large constant beyond which every integer is a sum of \( {}4425 \) eleventh powers by their theorems (as refined by James for odd powers), I prove here that also every integer less than \( C \) is a sum of \( {}4425 \) powers.
@article {key1574183m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Universal {W}aring theorem for eleventh
powers},
JOURNAL = {J. London Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {The Journal of the London Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {9},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1934},
PAGES = {201--206},
DOI = {10.1112/jlms/s1-9.3.201},
NOTE = {MR:1574183. Zbl:0009.29904. JFM:60.0140.02.},
ISSN = {0024-6107},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Waring’s problem for ninth powers ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
40 : 6
(1934 ),
pp. 487–493 .
MR
1562885
JFM
60.0140.01
Zbl
0009.29903
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In a previous paper in this Bulletin (vol. 39 (1933), p. 701), I gave a method to obtain universal Waring theorems by supplementing the asymptotic results obtained by the analytic theory of Hardy and Littlewood. I quoted results obtained from tables of all minimum decompositions into powers. Later I discovered an ideal method of making such a table, which is now algebraic rather than numerical. Quite recently, I found that we can greatly shorten the work and the table itself if we do not require that our decompositions be minimal. We may discard more than half the linear functions necessary for a minimal table.
The conclusion is that every positive integer is a sum of \( {}981 \) integral ninth powers \( {}\geq 0 \) . This is close to the asymptotic result \( {}949 \) by Hardy and Littlewood.
@article {key1562885m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Waring's problem for ninth powers},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {40},
NUMBER = {6},
YEAR = {1934},
PAGES = {487--493},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1934-05905-6},
NOTE = {MR:1562885. Zbl:0009.29903. JFM:60.0140.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A new method for Waring theorems with polynomial summands ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
36 : 4
(1934 ),
pp. 731–748 .
MR
1501763
JFM
60.0942.01
Zbl
0010.29501
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Part I of this paper is self-contained and presupposes only the rudiments of elementary theory of numbers. The method employs a pair of polynomials \( p(x) \) and \( q(x) \) of degree \( n \) , each uniquely determined by the other, such that there exists an identity which expresses \( Iq(s) \) as a sum of \( m \) values of \( p(x^2) \) , where \( I \) is an integer and \( s \) is a sum of four squares. Then a Waring theorem for \( q(x) \) yields one for \( p(x^2) \) . For, if every (large) integer is a sum of \( v \) values of \( q(x) \) , then every (large) multiple of \( I \) is a sum of \( vm \) values of \( p(x^2) \) . From the last result we readily find how many values of \( p(x^2) \) suffice for all integers.
Apart from the special case in which \( q(x) \) is a power of \( x \) , there is no hint in the literature of this instantaneous deduction of a Waring theorem for an even polynomial of degree \( {}2n \) from a known Waring theorem for a polynomial of degree \( n \) . On the contrary, Maillet resorted to an extensive proof for the case \( n = 2 \) .
We feel justified in perfecting the theory of sums of four values of a quadratic function \( q(x) \) in view of the resulting theorems for certain polynomials of degrees \( {}4 \) , \( {}8 \) , etc.
Since we seek Waring theorems holding for all positive integers (or with all exceptions listed), we are not content with theorems holding for all sufficiently large integers and certainly not with the asymptotic results much in vogue.
@article {key1501763m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A new method for {W}aring theorems with
polynomial summands},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {36},
NUMBER = {4},
YEAR = {1934},
PAGES = {731--748},
DOI = {10.2307/1989820},
NOTE = {MR:1501763. Zbl:0010.29501. JFM:60.0942.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Polygonal numbers and related Waring problems ,”
Quart. J. Math. Oxford Ser.
5
(1934 ),
pp. 283–290 .
JFM
60.0942.04
Zbl
0010.39101
article
Abstract
BibTeX
We shall apply a theorem recently proved in this Journal [Pall 1931] to obtain new results on sums of values of any quadratic function, in particular for
\begin{equation*}\tag{1} \frac{1}{2}m(x^2-x)+x \end{equation*}
(\( x \) an integer \( {}\geq 0 \) ), which is called a polygonal number of order \( m+2 \) . If \( m = 1 \) , (1) is the triangular number \( x(x+1)/2 \) ; for \( m = 2 \) , it is the square \( x^2 \) . There is no improvement on the classic results that every positive integer is a sum of three triangular numbers, and also is a sum of four squares.
@article {key0010.39101z,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Polygonal numbers and related {W}aring
problems},
JOURNAL = {Quart. J. Math. Oxford Ser.},
FJOURNAL = {The Quarterly Journal of Mathematics.
Oxford Series},
VOLUME = {5},
YEAR = {1934},
PAGES = {283--290},
DOI = {10.1093/qmath/os-5.1.283},
NOTE = {Zbl:0010.39101. JFM:60.0942.04.},
ISSN = {0033-5606},
}
L. E. Dickson :
History of the theory of numbers .
Stechert (New York ),
1934 .
With a chapter on the class number by G. H. Cresse.
Republication of Volumes I (1919) , II (1920) and III (1923) of the original series.
JFM
60.0817.03
book
People
BibTeX
@book {key60.0817.03j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {History of the theory of numbers},
PUBLISHER = {Stechert},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1934},
NOTE = {With a chapter on the class number by
G.~H. Cresse. Republication of Volumes
I (1919), II (1920) and III (1923) of
the original series. JFM:60.0817.03.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Universal Waring theorems with cubic summands ,”
Acta Arith.
1 : 2
(1935 ),
pp. 184–196 .
Also published in Prace Mat.-Fiz. 43 (1936) .
JFM
62.1137.03
Zbl
0013.10401
article
Abstract
BibTeX
We shall obtain systematically \( {}116 \) cubic polynomials \( f(x) \) with rational coefficients such that \( f(x) \) has an integral value \( {}\geq 0 \) for every integer \( x\geq 0 \) and such that every positive integer is proved to be a sum of nine values of \( f(x) \) for integers \( x\geq 0 \) . The proof avoids the use of other papers. For several of the \( f \) , we obtain facts which indicated that it is highly probable that (instead of \( {}9 \) ) \( {}5 \) or \( {}4 \) values suffice.
@article {key0013.10401z,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Universal {W}aring theorems with cubic
summands},
JOURNAL = {Acta Arith.},
FJOURNAL = {Acta Arithmetica},
VOLUME = {1},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1935},
PAGES = {184--196},
URL = {http://matwbn.icm.edu.pl/ksiazki/aa/aa1/aa1114.pdf},
NOTE = {Also published in \textit{Prace Mat.-Fiz.}
\textbf{43} (1936). Zbl:0013.10401.
JFM:62.1137.03.},
ISSN = {0065-1036},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Cyclotomy, higher congruences, and Waring’s problem ,”
Amer. J. Math.
57 : 2
(April 1935 ),
pp. 391–424 .
MR
1507083
JFM
61.0175.01
Zbl
0012.01203
article
BibTeX
@article {key1507083m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Cyclotomy, higher congruences, and {W}aring's
problem},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {57},
NUMBER = {2},
MONTH = {April},
YEAR = {1935},
PAGES = {391--424},
DOI = {10.2307/2371217},
NOTE = {MR:1507083. Zbl:0012.01203. JFM:61.0175.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Cyclotomy, higher congruences, and Waring’s problem, II: The Waring problem for polynomial summands ,”
Amer. J. Math.
57 : 3
(July 1935 ),
pp. 463–474 .
MR
1507087
JFM
61.0175.02
Zbl
0012.29004
article
BibTeX
@article {key1507087m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Cyclotomy, higher congruences, and {W}aring's
problem, {II}: {T}he {W}aring problem
for polynomial summands},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {57},
NUMBER = {3},
MONTH = {July},
YEAR = {1935},
PAGES = {463--474},
DOI = {10.2307/2371178},
NOTE = {MR:1507087. Zbl:0012.29004. JFM:61.0175.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Linear algebras with associativity not assumed ,”
Duke Math. J.
1 : 2
(1935 ),
pp. 113–125 .
MR
1545870
JFM
61.0125.01
Zbl
0012.14801
article
Abstract
BibTeX
The complete struture of linear associative algebras was known to depend upon the division algebras. When the reference field \( F \) is an algebraic field, H. Hasse has recently proved that every normal division algebra is cyclic. This perfection of the theory of associative algebras justifies attention to non-associative algebras.
Known examples of non-associative division algebras are Cayley’s algebra of order \( {}8 \) , and the writer’s [1914, p. 14, p. 69 (p. 17 for the characteristic equations); 1907–1908, p. 169; 1906a; 1906b] commutative algebras of orders \( {}3 \) and \( {}2n \) (§15). Many new division algebras of order \( {}4 \) are given here by Theorems 2 and 3.
In §§7–11 we determine all types of algebras of order \( {}3 \) having a principal unit (or modulus) denoted by \( {}1 \) . Except for special values of the parameters, these algebras are simple. It is known that every associative simple algebra of order \( {}3 \) is a division algebra.
@article {key1545870m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Linear algebras with associativity not
assumed},
JOURNAL = {Duke Math. J.},
FJOURNAL = {Duke Mathematical Journal},
VOLUME = {1},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1935},
PAGES = {113--125},
DOI = {10.1215/S0012-7094-35-00112-0},
NOTE = {MR:1545870. Zbl:0012.14801. JFM:61.0125.01.},
ISSN = {0012-7094},
CODEN = {DUMJAO},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Cyclotomy when \( e \) is composite ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
38 : 2
(September 1935 ),
pp. 187–200 .
An abstract was published in Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 41 :5 (1935) .
MR
1501808
JFM
61.0175.04
Zbl
0012.33803
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Let \( p \) be a prime and \( e \) a divisor of \( p-1 = ef \) . We seek the \( e^2 \) cyclotomic constants \( (k,h) \) .
Here we give a simple complete theory for \( e = 9 \) and the further facts sufficient for a complete theory for \( e = 18 \) .
@article {key1501808m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Cyclotomy when \$e\$ is composite},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {38},
NUMBER = {2},
MONTH = {September},
YEAR = {1935},
PAGES = {187--200},
DOI = {10.2307/1989680},
NOTE = {An abstract was published in \textit{Bull.
Amer. Math. Soc.} \textbf{41}:5 (1935).
MR:1501808. Zbl:0012.33803. JFM:61.0175.04.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Cyclotomy and trinomial congruences ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
37 : 3
(1935 ),
pp. 363–380 .
An abstract was published in Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 41 :1 (1935) .
MR
1501791
JFM
61.0175.03
Zbl
0011.29301
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In the algebraic theory of cyclotomy we regard as known (or computed by tables of indices) one or more of the functions \( R(1,n) \) , which Jacobi denoted by \( \psi_n \) . By rational operations and root extractions we obtain Jacobi’s function \( F \) , then the periods, and finally the \( e^2 \) cyclotomic constants \( (k,h) \) ; see §6.
We here develop an arithmetical theory valid for every prime \( p = ef+1 \) . The \( R(1,n) \) are not computed by tables of indices, but are found in the simpler cases by representations of multiples of \( p \) by binary quadratic forms, and in general by a system of Diophantine equations (§§13–17). The cyclotomic constants \( (k,h) \) are found from linear equations, some of which are derived from linear relations between pairs of the functions \( R(m,n) \) . In an earlier memoir [1935] we treated in full the cases \( e = 3, 4, \) \( {}5, 6, \) \( {}8, 10, 12 \) . Here we treat the cases in which \( e \) is a prime or a double of a prime. In particular, we find the number of solutions of \( x^e+y^e \equiv \pm 1 \) (mod \( p \) ).
@article {key1501791m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Cyclotomy and trinomial congruences},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {37},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1935},
PAGES = {363--380},
DOI = {10.2307/1989714},
NOTE = {An abstract was published in \textit{Bull.
Amer. Math. Soc.} \textbf{41}:1 (1935).
MR:1501791. Zbl:0011.29301. JFM:61.0175.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Congruences involving only \( e \) -th powers ,”
Acta Arith.
1 : 1
(1935 ),
pp. 161–167 .
Available open access
here .
JFM
61.0175.05
Zbl
0011.05302
article
Abstract
BibTeX
A. Hurwitz [1909, p. 272] proved that if \( e \) is an odd prime,
\begin{align*} & ax^e + by^e + cz^e \equiv 0 \pmod{p},\\ & abc\neq 0 \end{align*}
has solutions prime to \( p \) for every prime \( p \) exceeding a specified limit. He also gave recursion formulas for the number \( N \) of solutions of the analogous congruence in any number of variables. We shall show that these formulas, in a more convenient form, serve to express \( N \) in terms of the cyclotomic constants \( (k,h) \) . Nor can the latter be avoided in spite of Hurwitz’s explicit exclusion of the theory of cyclotomy.
Moreover we remove the restriction that \( e \) is a prime.
@article {key0011.05302z,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Congruences involving only \$e\$-th powers},
JOURNAL = {Acta Arith.},
FJOURNAL = {Acta Arithmetica},
VOLUME = {1},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1935},
PAGES = {161--167},
NOTE = {Available open access at http://matwbn.icm.edu.pl/ksiazki/aa/aa1/aa1112.pdf.
Zbl:0011.05302. JFM:61.0175.05.},
ISSN = {0065-1036},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Cyclotomy when \( e \) is composite ,”
Bull. Amer. Math. Soc.
41 : 5
(1935 ),
pp. 348 .
Abstract only.
Abstract for article in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 38 :2 (1935) .
JFM
61.0180.13
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Let \( p \) be a prime and \( e \) a divisor of \( p-1 = ef \) . We seek the \( e^2 \) cyclotomic constants \( (k,h) \) .
Here we give a simple complete theory for \( e = 9 \) and the further facts sufficient for a complete theory for \( e = 18 \) .
@article {key61.0180.13j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Cyclotomy when \$e\$ is composite},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Amer. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {41},
NUMBER = {5},
YEAR = {1935},
PAGES = {348},
URL = {http://www.ams.org/journals/bull/1935-41-05/S0002-9904-1935-06097-5/S0002-9904-1935-06097-5.pdf},
NOTE = {Abstract only. Abstract for article
in \textit{Trans. Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{38}:2
(1935). JFM:61.0180.13.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Cyclotomy and trinomial congruences ,”
Bull. Amer. Math. Soc.
41 : 1
(1935 ),
pp. 36 .
Abstract only.
Abstract for article in Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 37 :3 (1935) .
JFM
61.0180.12
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In the algebraic theory of cyclotomy we regard as known (or computed by tables of indices) one or more of the functions \( R(1,n) \) , which Jacobi denoted by \( \psi_n \) . By rational operations and root extractions we obtain Jacobi’s function \( F \) , then the periods, and finally the \( e^2 \) cyclotomic constants \( (k,h) \) ; see §6.
We here develop an arithmetical theory valid for every prime \( p = ef+1 \) . The \( R(1,n) \) are not computed by tables of indices, but are found in the simpler cases by representations of multiples of \( p \) by binary quadratic forms, and in general by a system of Diophantine equations (§§13–17). The cyclotomic constants \( (k,h) \) are found from linear equations, some of which are derived from linear relations between pairs of the functions \( R(m,n) \) . In an earlier memoir [1935] we treated in full the cases \( e = 3, 4, \) \( {}5, 6, \) \( {}8, 10, 12 \) . Here we treat the cases in which \( e \) is a prime or a double of a prime. In particular, we find the number of solutions of \( x^e+y^e \equiv \pm 1 \) (mod \( p \) ).
@article {key61.0180.12j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Cyclotomy and trinomial congruences},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Amer. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {41},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1935},
PAGES = {36},
URL = {http://www.ams.org/journals/bull/1935-41-01/S0002-9904-1935-06031-8/S0002-9904-1935-06031-8.pdf},
NOTE = {Abstract only. Abstract for article
in \textit{Trans. Am. Math. Soc.} \textbf{37}:3
(1935). JFM:61.0180.12.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On Waring’s problem and its generalization ,”
Bull. Amer. Math. Soc.
41 : 11
(1935 ),
pp. 795 .
Abstract only.
Abstract for article in Ann. Math. 37 :2 (1936) .
JFM
61.1075.08
article
Abstract
BibTeX
By a modification of the latest method of Vinogradow in the current Annals of Mathematics , his small number of \( n \) -th powers whose sum yields every large integer \( N \) is reduced by ten or more. The same conclusion is obtained when the \( n \) -th powers are multiplied by any given positive integer. A \( C \) is found for which the above results hold for every \( N > C \) . Universal Waring theorems are then deduced. If \( q \) denotes the greatest integer \( {} < (3/2)^n \) , then \( q^{2^n}-1 \) is the sum of \( I = q + 2^n - 2 \) , but no fewer, \( n \) -th powers. No integer has been found which requires more than \( I \) powers. This ideal \( I \) is \( {}4223, \) \( {}8384, \) \( {}16673 \) when \( n = 12, \) \( {}13, 14 \) . When \( n = 12 \) to \( {}17 \) it is proved that every positive integer is a sum of \( I \) \( n \) -th powers. Moreover, for \( n = 12 \) or \( {}13 \) , every integer \( {}\geq 2\cdot 3^n \) is a sum of \( {}2757 \) or \( {}4342 \) \( n \) -th powers; every integer \( {}\geq 4^{14} \) is a sum of \( {}5238 \) fourteenth powers. These results fail for slightly smaller integers.
@article {key61.1075.08j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On {W}aring's problem and its generalization},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Amer. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {41},
NUMBER = {11},
YEAR = {1935},
PAGES = {795},
URL = {http://www.ams.org/journals/bull/1935-41-11/S0002-9904-1935-06194-4/S0002-9904-1935-06194-4.pdf},
NOTE = {Abstract only. Abstract for article
in \textit{Ann. Math.} \textbf{37}:2
(1936). JFM:61.1075.08.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Universal Waring theorems ,”
Monatsh. Math. Phys.
43 : 1
(1936 ),
pp. 391–400 .
MR
1550541
JFM
62.1134.02
Zbl
0014.10205
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In 1770 Waring conjectured that every positive integer is a sum of at most \( {}9 \) cubes, also is a sum of at most \( {}19 \) fourth powers, etc. This has been proved only for cubes. If \( q \) denotes the greatest integer \( {} < (3/2)^n \) , it was known to Euler that \( q\cdot 2^n - 1 \) is a sum of
\[ I = q + 2^n - 2 ,\]
but not fewer, \( n \) -th powers.
We here announce proof of Waring’s conjecture for \( n = 12, \) \( {}13, 14 \) (when \( I=4223, \) \( {}8384, 16673 \) , respectively), and for \( n=15, 17 \) .
Ever positive integer is a sum of \( {}4223 \) twelfth powers; also of \( {}8384 \) thirteenth powers; also of \( {}16673 \) fourteenth powers.
But we go further and prove
Every integer \( {}\geq 2\cdot 3^{12} \) is a sum of \( {}2757 \) twelfth powers. Every one \( {}\geq 2\cdot 3^{12} \) is a sum of \( {}4342 \) thirteenth powers. Every integer \( {}\geq 4^{14} \) is a sum of \( {}5184 \) fourteenth powers. These results fail for slightly smaller integers.
@article {key1550541m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Universal {W}aring theorems},
JOURNAL = {Monatsh. Math. Phys.},
FJOURNAL = {Monatshefte f\"ur Mathematik und Physik},
VOLUME = {43},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1936},
PAGES = {391--400},
DOI = {10.1007/BF01707618},
NOTE = {MR:1550541. Zbl:0014.10205. JFM:62.1134.02.},
ISSN = {0026-9255},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Waring theorems of new type ,”
Amer. J. Math.
58 : 2
(1936 ),
pp. 241–248 .
MR
1507147
JFM
62.0143.03
Zbl
0013.34604
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Denote \( ax^3 + by^3 \) by \( (a,b) \) and similarly for several variables, which we restrict to integral values \( {}\geq 0 \) . We shall prove
Every integer \( {}\geq 0 \) is a sum of three values of any of the forms \( (1,1,j) \) , \( j=1,2,5 \) ; \( (1,2,k) \) , \( k=2,\dots,6 \) .
For \( (1,1,1) \) , this is Waring’s theorem on nine cubes.
Every integer \( {}\geq 0 \) is a sum of five values of \( (1,2) \) . All integers \( {} > 11^{12}(19.006868) \) are sums of five values of \( (1,5) \) .
In Theorem 2 we may take zero as one of the ten cubes.
@article {key1507147m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Waring theorems of new type},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {58},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1936},
PAGES = {241--248},
DOI = {10.2307/2371033},
NOTE = {MR:1507147. Zbl:0013.34604. JFM:62.0143.03.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Proof of the ideal Waring theorem for exponents \( {}7 \) –\( {}180 \) ,”
Amer. J. Math.
58 : 3
(1936 ),
pp. 521–529 .
MR
1507175
JFM
62.0144.01
Zbl
0014.25102
article
Abstract
BibTeX
If \( q \) denotes the greatest integer \( {} < (3/2)^n \) , then \( {}2^nq-1 \) is a sum of
\[ I = 2^n + q - 2 ,\]
but not fewer, \( n \) -th powers. The ideal Waring theorem states that every positive integer is a sum of \( I \) \( n \) -th powers; for example, \( {}4 \) squares, \( {}9 \) cubes, \( {}19 \) fourth powers. Proofs for squares and cubes are classic. For \( n\leq 20 \) proof has been found, but not yet published, by use of a “constant” far exceeding our new constant \( N \) in Theorem 1, and the use of more or less extensive tables.
Using the new \( N \) , we here prove without any tables the ideal Waring theorem for \( {}9\leq n\leq 180 \) , and by use of tables also for \( n=7 \) and \( {}8 \) . For \( n=6 \) we cannot attain the ideal \( {}73 \) , but reach \( {}115 \) (the best earlier result being \( {}160 \) ).
@article {key1507175m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Proof of the ideal {W}aring theorem
for exponents \${}7\$--\${}180\$},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {58},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1936},
PAGES = {521--529},
DOI = {10.2307/2370969},
NOTE = {MR:1507175. Zbl:0014.25102. JFM:62.0144.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Solution of Waring’s problem ,”
Amer. J. Math.
58 : 3
(1936 ),
pp. 530–535 .
MR
1507176
JFM
62.0144.02
Zbl
0014.25103
article
Abstract
BibTeX
I shall prove the Waring theorem in its original sense, in contrast to an asymptotic result. For every \( n > 6 \) I shall evaluate \( g(n) \) such that every positive integer is a sum of \( g(n) \) integral \( n \) -th powers \( {}\geq 0 \) , while not all are sums of \( g - 1 \) . Since this paper is a sequel to my preceding one, I shall continue the numbering of formulas, sections, theorems and lemmas.
@article {key1507176m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Solution of {W}aring's problem},
JOURNAL = {Amer. J. Math.},
FJOURNAL = {American Journal of Mathematics},
VOLUME = {58},
NUMBER = {3},
YEAR = {1936},
PAGES = {530--535},
DOI = {10.2307/2370970},
NOTE = {MR:1507176. Zbl:0014.25103. JFM:62.0144.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9327},
CODEN = {AJMAAN},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The ideal Waring theorem for twelfth powers ,”
Duke Math. J.
2 : 2
(1936 ),
pp. 192–204 .
MR
1545918
JFM
62.1134.01
Zbl
0014.25101
article
Abstract
BibTeX
@article {key1545918m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The ideal {W}aring theorem for twelfth
powers},
JOURNAL = {Duke Math. J.},
FJOURNAL = {Duke Mathematical Journal},
VOLUME = {2},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1936},
PAGES = {192--204},
DOI = {10.1215/S0012-7094-36-00218-1},
NOTE = {MR:1545918. Zbl:0014.25101. JFM:62.1134.01.},
ISSN = {0012-7094},
CODEN = {DUMJAO},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“The Waring problem and its generalizations ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
42 : 12
(1936 ),
pp. 833–842 .
MR
1563447
JFM
62.1131.02
Zbl
0015.34304
article
BibTeX
@article {key1563447m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {The {W}aring problem and its generalizations},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {42},
NUMBER = {12},
YEAR = {1936},
PAGES = {833--842},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1936-06432-3},
NOTE = {MR:1563447. Zbl:0015.34304. JFM:62.1131.02.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A generalization of Waring’s problem ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
42 : 8
(1936 ),
pp. 525–529 .
MR
1563348
JFM
62.0145.01
Zbl
0014.34502
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Define \( g(n,m) \) so that every integer \( {}\geq m \) is a sum of \( g \) \( n \) -th powers, while not every integer \( {}\geq m \) is a sum of \( g - 1 \) powers. It is customary to write \( g(n) \) for \( g(n,,0) = g(n,1) \) . Quite recently I evaluated \( g(n) \) for every \( n > 6 \) .
For \( n=9 \) or \( {}11 \) , I evaluate \( g(n,m) \) for each \( m \) below specified large values \( M \) . In particular, \( g(11,M)=336 \) and \( g(9,M) = 163 \) are small compared with \( g(11) = 2132 \) and \( g(9) = 548 \) .
By use of the Hardy–Littlewood Theory and extensive tables, it was found that \( g(6) \leq 160 \) . I here obtain \( g(6) = 110 \) .
@article {key1563348m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A generalization of {W}aring's problem},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {42},
NUMBER = {8},
YEAR = {1936},
PAGES = {525--529},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1936-06348-2},
NOTE = {MR:1563348. Zbl:0014.34502. JFM:62.0145.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“A new method for Waring theorems with polynomial summands, II ,”
Trans. Am. Math. Soc.
39 : 2
(1936 ),
pp. 205–208 .
An abstract was published in Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 41 :11 (1935) .
MR
1501842
JFM
62.0148.01
Zbl
0014.01004
article
Abstract
BibTeX
In a paper with the same title [1934], I showed how to deduce instantaneously a Waring theorem for an even polynomial \( f(x) \) of degree \( {}2n \) from a known Waring theorem for a polynomial \( q(x) \) of degree \( n \) . Here I extend the method to the new case in which \( f(x) \) contains also a term in \( x \) .
@article {key1501842m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {A new method for {W}aring theorems with
polynomial summands, {II}},
JOURNAL = {Trans. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Transactions of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {39},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1936},
PAGES = {205--208},
DOI = {10.2307/1989744},
NOTE = {An abstract was published in \textit{Bull.
Amer. Math. Soc.} \textbf{41}:11 (1935).
MR:1501842. Zbl:0014.01004. JFM:62.0148.01.},
ISSN = {0002-9947},
CODEN = {TAMTAM},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“On Waring’s problem and its generalization ,”
Ann. Math. (2)
37 : 2
(April 1936 ),
pp. 293–316 .
An abstract was published in Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 41 :11 (1935) .
MR
1503278
JFM
62.1133.03
Zbl
0013.39102
article
Abstract
BibTeX
By a modification of the latest method of Vinogradow in the current Annals of Mathematics , his small number of \( n \) -th powers whose sum yields every large integer \( N \) is reduced by ten or more. The same conclusion is obtained when the \( n \) -th powers are multiplied by any given positive integer. A \( C \) is found for which the above results hold for every \( N > C \) . Universal Waring theorems are then deduced. If \( q \) denotes the greatest integer \( {} < (3/2)^n \) , then \( q^{2^n}-1 \) is the sum of \( I = q + 2^n - 2 \) , but no fewer, \( n \) -th powers. No integer has been found which requires more than \( I \) powers. This ideal \( I \) is \( {}4223, \) \( {}8384, \) \( {}16673 \) when \( n = 12, \) \( {}13, 14 \) . When \( n = 12 \) to \( {}17 \) it is proved that every positive integer is a sum of \( I \) \( n \) -th powers. Moreover, for \( n = 12 \) or \( {}13 \) , every integer \( {}\geq 2\cdot 3^n \) is a sum of \( {}2757 \) or \( {}4342 \) \( n \) -th powers; every integer \( {}\geq 4^{14} \) is a sum of \( {}5238 \) fourteenth powers. These results fail for slightly smaller integers.
@article {key1503278m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {On {W}aring's problem and its generalization},
JOURNAL = {Ann. Math. (2)},
FJOURNAL = {Annals of Mathematics. Second Series},
VOLUME = {37},
NUMBER = {2},
MONTH = {April},
YEAR = {1936},
PAGES = {293--316},
DOI = {10.2307/1968443},
NOTE = {An abstract was published in \textit{Bull.
Amer. Math. Soc.} \textbf{41}:11 (1935).
MR:1503278. Zbl:0013.39102. JFM:62.1133.03.},
ISSN = {0003-486X},
CODEN = {ANMAAH},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Universal Waring theorems with cubic summands ,”
Prace Mat.-Fiz.
43 : 1
(1936 ),
pp. 223–235 .
Also published in Acta Arith. 1 :2 (1935) .
article
BibTeX
@article {key18441400,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Universal {W}aring theorems with cubic
summands},
JOURNAL = {Prace Mat.-Fiz.},
FJOURNAL = {Prace Matematyczno-Fizyczne},
VOLUME = {43},
NUMBER = {1},
YEAR = {1936},
PAGES = {223--235},
URL = {http://matwbn.icm.edu.pl/ksiazki/pmf/pmf43/pmf43112.pdf},
NOTE = {Also published in \textit{Acta Arith.}
\textbf{1}:2 (1935).},
ISSN = {0867-5570},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Universal forms \( \sum a_ix_i^n \) and Waring’s problem ,”
Acta Arith.
2 : 2
(1937 ),
pp. 177–196 .
Available open access
here .
JFM
63.0907.02
Zbl
0018.29403
article
BibTeX
@article {key0018.29403z,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Universal forms \$\sum a_ix_i^n\$ and
{W}aring's problem},
JOURNAL = {Acta Arith.},
FJOURNAL = {Acta Arithmetica},
VOLUME = {2},
NUMBER = {2},
YEAR = {1937},
PAGES = {177--196},
NOTE = {Available open access at http://matwbn.icm.edu.pl/ksiazki/aa/aa2/aa223.pdf.
Zbl:0018.29403. JFM:63.0907.02.},
ISSN = {0065-1036},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“New Waring theorems for polygonal numbers ,”
Quart. J. Math. Oxford Ser.
8
(1937 ),
pp. 62–65 .
JFM
63.0125.06
Zbl
0016.39102
article
Abstract
BibTeX
Cauchy was the first to publish a proof of Fermat’s assertion that every positive integer is a sum of \( m+2 \) or fewer polygonal numbers
\[ p(m,x) = \frac{1}{2}m(x^2-x) + x \]
(\( x \) an integer \( {}\geq 0 \) ) of order \( m+2 \) . Since \( p(m,0)= 0 \) , we may omit the phrase ‘or fewer’. The number \( m+2 \) of summands is reduced nearly a half in the following remarkable new theorems.
@article {key0016.39102z,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {New {W}aring theorems for polygonal
numbers},
JOURNAL = {Quart. J. Math. Oxford Ser.},
FJOURNAL = {The Quarterly Journal of Mathematics.
Oxford Series},
VOLUME = {8},
YEAR = {1937},
PAGES = {62--65},
DOI = {10.1093/qmath/os-8.1.62},
NOTE = {Zbl:0016.39102. JFM:63.0125.06.},
ISSN = {0033-5606},
}
G. A. Bliss and L. E. Dickson :
“Eliakim Hastings Moore: 1862–1932 ,”
Biographical Memoirs of the National Academy of Sciences
17
(1937 ),
pp. 83–102 .
article
People
BibTeX
Read it here
@article {key45976030,
AUTHOR = {Gilbert A. Bliss and Leonard E. Dickson},
TITLE = {Eliakim Hastings Moore: 1862--1932},
JOURNAL = {Biographical Memoirs of the National
Academy of Sciences},
VOLUME = {17},
YEAR = {1937},
PAGES = {83--102},
}
G. A. Miller, H. F. Blichfeldt, and L. E. Dickson :
Theory and applications of finite groups ,
2nd edition.
G. E. Stechert (New York ),
1938 .
Republication of 1916 original . See also 1961 edition .
JFM
64.0959.03
book
People
BibTeX
@book {key64.0959.03j,
AUTHOR = {Miller, G. A. and Blichfeldt, H. F.
and Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Theory and applications of finite groups},
EDITION = {2nd},
PUBLISHER = {G. E. Stechert},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1938},
PAGES = {xvii+390},
NOTE = {Republication of 1916 original. See
also 1961 edition. JFM:64.0959.03.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
Algebras and their arithmetics ,
2nd edition.
G. E. Stechert (New York ),
1938 .
Republication of 1923 original . See also 1960 edition .
JFM
0021.29401
book
BibTeX
@book {key0021.29401j,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Algebras and their arithmetics},
EDITION = {2nd},
PUBLISHER = {G. E. Stechert},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1938},
PAGES = {xii+241},
NOTE = {Republication of 1923 original. See
also 1960 edition. JFM:0021.29401.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“All integers except \( {}23 \) and \( {}239 \) are sums of eight cubes ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
45
(1939 ),
pp. 588–591 .
MR
0000028
Zbl
0021.39102
article
Abstract
BibTeX
@article {key0000028m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {All integers except \${}23\$ and \${}239\$
are sums of eight cubes},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {45},
YEAR = {1939},
PAGES = {588--591},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1939-07041-9},
NOTE = {MR:0000028. Zbl:0021.39102.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
New first course in the theory of equations .
John Wiley & Sons (New York ),
1939 .
Republication of 1922 original .
MR
0000002
JFM
65.1117.04
Zbl
0060.04601
book
BibTeX
@book {key0000002m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {New first course in the theory of equations},
PUBLISHER = {John Wiley \& Sons},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1939},
PAGES = {ix+185},
NOTE = {Republication of 1922 original. MR:0000002.
Zbl:0060.04601. JFM:65.1117.04.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
Modern elementary theory of numbers .
University of Chicago Press ,
1939 .
MR
0000387
JFM
65.1141.03
Zbl
0027.29502, 0024.24801
book
BibTeX
@book {key0000387m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Modern elementary theory of numbers},
PUBLISHER = {University of Chicago Press},
YEAR = {1939},
PAGES = {vii+309},
NOTE = {MR:0000387. Zbl:0027.29502, 0024.24801.
JFM:65.1141.03.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
“Obituary: Hans Frederik Blichfeldt, 1873–1945 ,”
Bull. Am. Math. Soc.
53
(1947 ),
pp. 882–883 .
MR
0021508
Zbl
0031.09905
article
People
BibTeX
@article {key0021508m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Obituary: {H}ans {F}rederik {B}lichfeldt,
1873--1945},
JOURNAL = {Bull. Am. Math. Soc.},
FJOURNAL = {Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society},
VOLUME = {53},
YEAR = {1947},
PAGES = {882--883},
DOI = {10.1090/S0002-9904-1947-08874-1},
NOTE = {MR:0021508. Zbl:0031.09905.},
ISSN = {0002-9904},
}
L. E. Dickson :
Linear groups with an exposition of the Galois field theory ,
reprint edition.
Dover Publications (New York ),
1958 .
With an introduction by Wilhelm Magnus.
Republication of 1901 original .
MR
0104735
Zbl
0082.24901
book
People
BibTeX
@book {key0104735m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Linear groups with an exposition of
the {G}alois field theory},
EDITION = {reprint},
PUBLISHER = {Dover Publications},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1958},
PAGES = {xvi+312},
NOTE = {With an introduction by Wilhelm Magnus.
Republication of 1901 original. MR:0104735.
Zbl:0082.24901.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
Algebraic theories ,
reprint edition.
Dover Publications (New York ),
1959 .
Republication of Modern algebraic theories (1926) .
MR
0105380
Zbl
0086.01103
book
BibTeX
@book {key0105380m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard E.},
TITLE = {Algebraic theories},
EDITION = {reprint},
PUBLISHER = {Dover Publications},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1959},
PAGES = {ix+276},
NOTE = {Republication of \textit{Modern algebraic
theories} (1926). MR:0105380. Zbl:0086.01103.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
Linear algebras ,
reprint edition.
Hafner (New York ),
1960 .
Republication of 1914 original .
MR
0118745
book
BibTeX
@book {key0118745m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Linear algebras},
EDITION = {reprint},
PUBLISHER = {Hafner},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1960},
PAGES = {viii+73},
NOTE = {Republication of 1914 original. MR:0118745.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
Algebras and their arithmetics ,
reprint edition.
Dover Publications (New York ),
1960 .
Republication of 1923 original . See also 1938 edition .
MR
0111764
Zbl
0086.25602
book
BibTeX
@book {key0111764m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {Algebras and their arithmetics},
EDITION = {reprint},
PUBLISHER = {Dover Publications},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1960},
PAGES = {xii+241},
NOTE = {Republication of 1923 original. See
also 1938 edition. MR:0111764. Zbl:0086.25602.},
}
G. A. Miller, H. F. Blichfeldt, and L. E. Dickson :
Theory and applications of finite groups ,
reprint edition.
Dover Publications (New York ),
1961 .
Republication of 1916 original . See also 1938 edition .
MR
0123600
Zbl
0098.25103
book
People
BibTeX
@book {key0123600m,
AUTHOR = {Miller, G. A. and Blichfeldt, H. F.
and Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Theory and applications of finite groups},
EDITION = {reprint},
PUBLISHER = {Dover Publications},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1961},
PAGES = {xvii+390},
NOTE = {Republication of 1916 original. See
also 1938 edition. MR:0123600. Zbl:0098.25103.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
History of the theory of numbers ,
reprint edition,
vol. II: Diophantine analysis .
Chelsea Publishing Co. (New York ),
1966 .
See also Volume I and Volume III . Republication of 1920 original . The whole series was also republished in 1934 .
MR
0245500
book
BibTeX
@book {key0245500m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {History of the theory of numbers},
EDITION = {reprint},
VOLUME = {II: Diophantine analysis},
PUBLISHER = {Chelsea Publishing Co.},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1966},
PAGES = {xxv+803},
NOTE = {See also Volume I and Volume III. Republication
of 1920 original. The whole series was
also republished in 1934. MR:0245500.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
History of the theory of numbers ,
reprint edition,
vol. III: Quadratic and higher forms .
Chelsea Publishing Co. (New York ),
1966 .
With a chapter on the class number by G. H. Cresse.
See also Volume I and Volume II . Republication of 1923 original . The whole series was also republished in 1934 .
MR
0245501
book
People
BibTeX
@book {key0245501m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {History of the theory of numbers},
EDITION = {reprint},
VOLUME = {III: Quadratic and higher forms},
PUBLISHER = {Chelsea Publishing Co.},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1966},
PAGES = {v+313},
NOTE = {With a chapter on the class number by
G.~H. Cresse. See also Volume I and
Volume II. Republication of 1923 original.
The whole series was also republished
in 1934. MR:0245501.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
On invariants and the theory of numbers ,
reprint edition.
Dover Publications (New York ),
1966 .
MR
0201389
Zbl
0139.26603
book
BibTeX
@book {key0201389m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {On invariants and the theory of numbers},
EDITION = {reprint},
PUBLISHER = {Dover Publications},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1966},
PAGES = {ix+110},
NOTE = {MR:0201389. Zbl:0139.26603.},
ISBN = {9780486438283},
}
L. E. Dickson :
History of the theory of numbers ,
reprint edition,
vol. I: Divisibility and primality .
Chelsea Publishing Co. (New York ),
1966 .
See also Volume II and Volume III . Republication of 1919 original . The whole series was also republished in 1934 .
MR
0245499
book
BibTeX
@book {key0245499m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {History of the theory of numbers},
EDITION = {reprint},
VOLUME = {I: Divisibility and primality},
PUBLISHER = {Chelsea Publishing Co.},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1966},
PAGES = {xii+486},
NOTE = {See also Volume II and Volume III. Republication
of 1919 original. The whole series was
also republished in 1934. MR:0245499.},
}
L. E. Dickson, H. H. Mitchell, H. S. Vandiver, and G. E. Wahlin :
Algebraic numbers ,
reprint edition.
Chelsea Publishing Co. (New York ),
1967 .
An expanded version of Algebraic numbers: Report of the committee on algebraic numbers (1932) .
MR
0241349
book
People
BibTeX
@book {key0241349m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E. and Mitchell, H. H. and
Vandiver, H. S. and Wahlin, G. E.},
TITLE = {Algebraic numbers},
EDITION = {reprint},
PUBLISHER = {Chelsea Publishing Co.},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1967},
PAGES = {ii+211},
NOTE = {An expanded version of \textit{Algebraic
numbers: Report of the committee on
algebraic numbers} (1932). MR:0241349.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
Plane trigonometry with practical applications ,
reprint edition.
Chelsea Publishing Co. (New York ),
1970 .
Republication of 1922 original .
Zbl
0208.23903
book
BibTeX
@book {key0208.23903z,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, L. E.},
TITLE = {Plane trigonometry with practical applications},
EDITION = {reprint},
PUBLISHER = {Chelsea Publishing Co.},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1970},
PAGES = {x+211},
NOTE = {Republication of 1922 original. Zbl:0208.23903.},
}
L. E. Dickson :
The collected mathematical papers of Leonard Eugene Dickson ,
vol. 3 .
Edited by A. A. Albert .
Chelsea Publishing Co. (New York ),
1975 .
MR
0441667
book
People
BibTeX
@book {key0441667m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {The collected mathematical papers of
{L}eonard {E}ugene {D}ickson},
VOLUME = {3},
PUBLISHER = {Chelsea Publishing Co.},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1975},
PAGES = {580},
NOTE = {Edited by A. A. Albert.
MR:0441667.},
ISBN = {9780828403061},
}
L. E. Dickson :
The collected mathematical papers of Leonard Eugene Dickson ,
vol. 5 .
Edited by A. A. Albert .
Chelsea Publishing Co. (New York ),
1975 .
MR
0441669
book
People
BibTeX
@book {key0441669m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {The collected mathematical papers of
{L}eonard {E}ugene {D}ickson},
VOLUME = {5},
PUBLISHER = {Chelsea Publishing Co.},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1975},
PAGES = {644},
NOTE = {Edited by A. A. Albert.
MR:0441669.},
ISBN = {9780828403061},
}
L. E. Dickson :
The collected mathematical papers of Leonard Eugene Dickson ,
vol. 4 .
Edited by A. A. Albert .
Chelsea Publishing Co. (New York ),
1975 .
MR
0441668
book
People
BibTeX
@book {key0441668m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {The collected mathematical papers of
{L}eonard {E}ugene {D}ickson},
VOLUME = {4},
PUBLISHER = {Chelsea Publishing Co.},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1975},
PAGES = {636},
NOTE = {Edited by A. A. Albert.
MR:0441668.},
ISBN = {9780828403061},
}
L. E. Dickson :
The collected mathematical papers of Leonard Eugene Dickson ,
vol. 1 .
Edited by A. A. Albert .
Chelsea Publishing Co. (New York ),
1975 .
MR
0441665
book
People
BibTeX
@book {key0441665m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {The collected mathematical papers of
{L}eonard {E}ugene {D}ickson},
VOLUME = {1},
PUBLISHER = {Chelsea Publishing Co.},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1975},
PAGES = {xvii+680},
NOTE = {Edited by A. A. Albert.
MR:0441665.},
ISBN = {9780828403061},
}
L. E. Dickson :
The collected mathematical papers of Leonard Eugene Dickson ,
vol. 2 .
Edited by A. A. Albert .
Chelsea Publishing Co. (New York ),
1975 .
MR
0441666
book
People
BibTeX
@book {key0441666m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {The collected mathematical papers of
{L}eonard {E}ugene {D}ickson},
VOLUME = {2},
PUBLISHER = {Chelsea Publishing Co.},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1975},
PAGES = {766},
NOTE = {Edited by A. A. Albert.
MR:0441666.},
ISBN = {9780828403061},
}
L. E. Dickson :
The collected mathematical papers of Leonard Eugene Dickson ,
vol. 6 .
Edited by A. A. Albert .
Chelsea Publishing Co. (New York ),
1983 .
MR
749229
book
People
BibTeX
@book {key749229m,
AUTHOR = {Dickson, Leonard Eugene},
TITLE = {The collected mathematical papers of
{L}eonard {E}ugene {D}ickson},
VOLUME = {6},
PUBLISHER = {Chelsea Publishing Co.},
ADDRESS = {New York},
YEAR = {1983},
PAGES = {714},
NOTE = {Edited by A. A. Albert.
MR:749229.},
ISBN = {9780828403061},
}